www.carburetor-manual.com "The ABC's of Carburetion" Would you like some Free Manuals?

www.carburetor-manual.com "The ABC's of Carburetion" Would you like some Free Manuals?

www.carburetor-manual.com

Would you like some Free Manuals?

http://carburetor-manual.com/free-shop-manual-club-t-13.html

Also visit http://freeshopmanual.com

for more Free Manuals

Also Visit my website for 7 FREE Download Manuals starting with this one.

"The ABC's of Carburetion"

Click Here Now

file:///C|/Documents%20and%20Settings/Tim/Desktop/carburetor-manual-welcome/index.htm[4/25/2009 11:42:20 AM]

yellow blue

The 1999 Cadillac Escalade Owner’s Manual

1

-

1 Seats and Restraint Systems

This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the air bag system.

2

-

1 Features and Controls

This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.

3

-

1 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.

4

-

1 Your Driving and the Road

Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.

5

-

1 Problems on the Road

This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.

6

-

1 Service and Appearance Care

Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.

7

-

1 Customer Assistance Information

This section tells you how to contact Cadillac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.

It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 7

-

10.

8

-

1 Index

Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

i

We support voluntary technician certification.

yellow blue

GENERAL MOTORS, GM and the GM Emblem,

CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath are registered trademarks and the name ESCALADE is a trademark of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name

“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor

Car Division whenever it appears in this manual.

Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it.

For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a

French Language Manual:

Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez votre concessionaire ou au:

DGN Marketing Services Ltd.

1577 Meyerside Dr.

Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9

Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 25691027 A First Edition

ii

E

Copyright General Motors Corporation 1998

All Rights Reserved

yellow blue

How to Use this Manual

Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly.

Index

A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.

Safety Warnings and Symbols

You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.

We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.

CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Don’t,”

“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage Warnings

Also, in this book you will find these notices:

NOTICE:

These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle.

yellow blue

In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.

But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words.

You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

iv

yellow blue

Vehicle Symbols

These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.

For example, these symbols are used on an original battery:

CAUTION

POSSIBLE

INJURY

These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven:

These symbols have to do with your lamps:

MASTER

LIGHTING

SWITCH

These symbols are on some of your controls:

WINDSHIELD

WIPER

PROTECT

EYES BY

SHIELDING

DOOR LOCK

UNLOCK

TURN

SIGNALS

WINDSHIELD

WASHER

PARKING

LAMPS CAUSTIC

BATTERY

ACID COULD

CAUSE

BURNS

FASTEN

SEAT

BELTS

HAZARD

WARNING

FLASHER

WINDSHIELD

DEFROSTER

AVOID

SPARKS OR

FLAMES

POWER

WINDOW

DAYTIME

RUNNING

LAMPS

REAR

WINDOW

DEFOGGER

SPARK OR

FLAME

COULD

EXPLODE

BATTERY

AIR BAG FOG LAMPS

VENTILATING

FAN

These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights:

ENGINE

COOLANT

TEMP

BATTERY

CHARGING

SYSTEM

BRAKE

COOLANT

ENGINE OIL

PRESSURE

ANTI-LOCK

BRAKES

Here are some other symbols you may see:

FUSE

LIGHTER

HORN

SPEAKER

FUEL

v

NOTES

vi

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.

1

-

2

1

-

8

Seats and Seat Controls

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone

1

-

13 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About

Safety Belts

--

and the Answers

1

-

14 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

1

-

14 Driver Position

1

-

22 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

1

-

23 Right Front Passenger Position

1

-

23 Air Bag System

1

-

30 Rear Seat Passengers

1

-

34 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

and Small Adults

1

-

37 Center Passenger Position

1

-

38 Children

1

-

41 Child Restraints

1

-

53 Larger Children

1

-

56 Safety Belt Extender

1

-

56 Checking Your Restraint Systems

1

-

56 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash

1-

1-1

Seats and Seat Controls

This section tells you about the seats

--

how to adjust them and fold them up and down. It also tells you about reclining front seatbacks and head restraints.

Power Seats

You can use the round center knob to move the seat to where you want it. To raise the seat, move the knob up.

To lower the seat, move the knob down. To move the seat forward or rearward, move the knob toward the front of the vehicle or toward the rear.

You can also raise and lower the front and rear of the seat. To raise or lower the front of the seat, move the front lever up or down. To raise or lower the rear of the seat, move the rear lever up or down.

The switches located at the front of this control panel are for the heated front seat and the power lumbar adjustment.

yellow blue

You can adjust the front seats with the controls located on the side of the seat, next to the door.

1-2

Power Lumbar Control Heated Front Seats

yellow blue

Your vehicle has a power lumbar control. You can increase or decrease lumbar support in an area of the lower seatback.

To increase support, press and hold the front of the rocker switch. Let go of the switch when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support.

To decrease support, press and hold the rear of the rocker switch. Let go of the switch when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of support.

The control for the driver’s side heated seat is located on the left side of the seat. The control for the right front passenger is located on the right side of the passenger seat. Move the switch forward to MED or HIGH temperature to turn on the heating elements in the seat.

The right front passenger’s safety belt must be buckled before the heating elements in that seat will operate. To turn the heated seats off, move the switch rearward to

OFF. For information on heated rear seats, see “Heated

Rear Seats” in the Index.

1-3

Reclining Front Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback, move the lever rearward.

Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it.

Move the lever again rearward and the seatback will go to an upright position.

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.

1-4

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this.

The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.

This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.

yellow blue

Head Restraints

Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

The head restraints tilt forward and rearward also.

Pull the head restraint forward to one of the preset positions.

To return the head restraint to its original position, pull the head restraint forward all the way and release.

Rear Seats

CAUTION:

If a head restraint is not installed on the seatback or stored in the vehicle properly, it could be thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured.

Remove the head restraints only when you need to fold the seat, and be sure that the head restraints are stored securely in the appropriate holes at the rear of the lower seat cushion. When the seat is returned to the passenger position, be sure the head restraints are installed properly.

1-5

Folding the Rear Seat

Your vehicle has a 60/40 rear seat, either side may be folded down to give you more cargo space.

Before folding, place the latch portion of the center safety belt in the center armrest. That way, the center safety belt will be out of the way when the seat is folded and also will be easily available for passengers to use when the seat is returned to the passenger position. Also, make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat.

When the seat is folded, it will lay flat on the floor.

To fold the seat, use the following procedure.

1. Pull up on the strap loop at the rear of the seat cushion.

2. Then, pull the seat cushion up and fold it forward.

3. Fold the seatback forward enough to allow removal of the head restraints.

4. Push and hold the release buttons at the bottom of each head restraint height head restraints aside for now. You will stow them in their proper position after you are done folding the seat.

adjust post and slide the head restraint out of the height

adjust tubes. Set the

yellow blue

1-6

5. Pull the seatback forward and fold the seatback down until it is flat.

6. Then, stow the head restraints by sliding them into the rear of the seat cushion. Make sure the posts go in all the way.

To return the seat to the passenger position, use the following procedure.

1. Remove the head restraints by sliding them out of the seat cushion.

yellow blue

2. Lift the seatback up enough to install the head restraints.

3. Push the seatback rearward all the way.

4. Lower the seat cushion until it latches in position.

5. After returning the seat to the passenger position, return the head restraints to the top of the seatback.

6. Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat cushion to make sure that the seat is securely in place.

If the latch plate portion of the center safety belt was put in the center armrest when the seat was folded, take the latch plate portion out and place it on the seat. That way, the center position safety belt will be available for the center rear seat passenger to use.

1-7

Heated Rear Seats

The controls for the heated rear seats are located on the rear of the center floor console, below the rear seat audio controls.

Press the top of the switch to HI or the bottom of the switch to LO to turn on the heating elements in the outside rear seat positions. The text HI or LO on the switch will illuminate to indicate that the heated seat elements are operating. The switch on the left side operates the left seat and the switch on the right side operates the right seat. The rear seat outside passenger’s safety belt must be attached before the heating element in that seat will operate. To turn the heated seats off, move the switch to the center. For more information on heated front seats, see “Heated Front Seats” in the Index.

1-8

yellow blue

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone

This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts.

And it explains the air bag system.

CAUTION:

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.

CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety Belt

Reminder Light” in the Index.)

yellow blue

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.

But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!

1-9

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

1-10

Put someone on it.

yellow blue

yellow blue

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.

In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

1-11

yellow blue

or the instrument panel ...

1-12

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.

You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense.

Here Are Questions Many People Ask

About Safety Belts

--

and the Answers

Q:

Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

A:

You could be

--

whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.

Q:

If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts?

A:

Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts

--

not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

yellow blue

Q:

If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts?

A:

You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident

--

even one that isn’t your fault

--

you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than

40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-13

yellow blue

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

Adults

This part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called

“Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has.

We’ll start with the driver position.

Driver Position

This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder Belt

The driver has a lap

shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Don’t let it get twisted.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt

Extender” at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-14

yellow blue

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.

1-15

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you.

yellow blue

To move it down, push in at the word PRESS and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it has locked into position.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

1-16

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

yellow blue

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A:

The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way.

1-17

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.

Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

yellow blue

A:

The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-18

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

yellow blue

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.

The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A:

The belt is over an armrest.

1-19

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

A:

The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-20

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury.

Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.

You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.

yellow blue

Q:

What’s wrong with this?

yellow blue

CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

A:

The belt is twisted across the body.

1-21

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

yellow blue

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap

shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-22

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt

--

except for one thing.

If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.

If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and start again.

Air Bag System

This part explains the air bag system.

Your vehicle has “Next Generation” frontal air bags

--

one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger.

Next Generation frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very quickly if they are to do their job and comply with federal regulations.

yellow blue

Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system:

CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt

--

even if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags

--

even Next Generation air bags

--

are designed to work with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, side or low

speed frontal crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, Next Generation air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly

--

whether or not there’s an air bag for that person.

1-23

CAUTION:

Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you would be if you were leaning forward, it could seriously injure you. This is true even with Next Generation frontal air bags.

Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with Next Generation air bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. This is true even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags plus lap

shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them.

Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual called

“Children” and see the caution labels on the sunvisors and the right front passenger’s safety belt.

yellow blue

1-24

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows

AIR BAG.

How the Air Bag System Works

yellow blue

The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information.

Where are the air bags?

The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

1-25

The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side.

CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering.

yellow blue

1-26

When should an air bag inflate?

An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near

frontal crash. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph

(14 to 26 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.

Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near

frontal impacts.

The air bag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including off

road usage.

Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.

As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off

Driving” in the Index for more tips on off

-

Road

road driving.

yellow blue

What makes an air bag inflate?

In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger.

How does an air bag restrain?

In moderate to severe frontal or near

frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near

frontal collisions.

1-27

What will you see after an air bag inflates?

After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module

--

the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag

--

will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

yellow blue

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag.

D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.

A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.

D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improper service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.

1-28

CAUTION:

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.

This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.

If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.

NOTICE:

If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.

If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water water up to the carpeting or higher

--

such as

--

or if water enters your vehicle and soaks the carpet, the air bag controller can be soaked and ruined. If this ever happens, and then you start your vehicle, the damage could make the air bags inflate, even if there’s no crash. You would have to replace the air bags as well as the sensors and related parts. If your vehicle is ever in a flood, or if it’s exposed to water that soaks the carpet, you can avoid needless repair costs by turning off the vehicle immediately and disconnecting the battery cables. Don’t let anyone start the vehicle under any circumstances. See your dealer for service.

yellow blue

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle

Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.

There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner

Publications” in the Index.

CAUTION:

For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.

The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

1-29

Adding Equipment to Your Air

Bag-Equipped Vehicle

Q:

If I add a push bumper or a bicycle rack to the front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags from working properly?

A:

As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the air bags from working properly in a crash.

Q:

Is there anything I might add to the front of the vehicle that could keep the air bags from working properly?

A:

Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or height, they may keep the air bag system from working properly. Also, the air bag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the air bag sensors. If you have any questions about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.

See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure” in the Index.)

1-30

yellow blue

Rear Seat Passengers

It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!

Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

Lap

-

Shoulder Belt

The positions next to the windows have lap

shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

yellow blue

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again.

If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt

Extender” at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Don’t let it get twisted.

1-31

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.

1-32

yellow blue

Each position next to the windows has a shoulder belt height adjuster. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height that is right for you.

yellow blue

To move the height adjuster down, push in at the word

PRESS and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without pushing in to make sure it has locked into position.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-33

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

yellow blue

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for

Children and Small Adults

Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head.

There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:

1-34

yellow blue

1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the side of the seatback.

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

1-35

yellow blue

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.

The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top.

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions” earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip.

Make sure you remove the comfort guide from the belt before you fold a rear seat down.

1-36

Center Passenger Position

Lap Belt

yellow blue

When you sit in the center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

1-37

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap

shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-38

Children

Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.

In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.

Smaller Children and Babies

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. This is true even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags plus lap

shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them.

Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle.

CAUTION:

Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child. A very young child’s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint.

yellow blue

Infants need complete support, including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a rear

facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint. This is so important that many hospitals today won’t release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a motor vehicle.

1-39

CAUTION:

Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much

--

until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash

CAUTION: (Continued)

1-40

CAUTION: (Continued) at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12

lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240

lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold.

Secure the baby in an infant restraint.

yellow blue

yellow blue

Child Restraints

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints.

Q:

What are the different types of add

on child restraints?

A:

Add

on child restraints are available in four basic types. When selecting a child restraint, take into consideration not only the child’s weight and size, but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.

An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed, make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle.

1-41

1-42

A rear

facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear

facing infant restraints are designed for infants of up to about

20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head, neck and body can have the support they need in a frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two parts

--

the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable.

yellow blue

yellow blue

A forward

facing child restraint (C

-

E) positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These forward

facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.

(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches

(66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is designed to be used either as a rear

facing infant seat or a forward

facing child seat.

1-43

1-44

A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs.

(18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four to eight years of age. A booster seat is designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.

Booster seats with shields use lap

only belts; however, booster seats without shields use lap

shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window.

yellow blue

yellow blue

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.

The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s manual and the child restraint instructions are important, so if either one of these is not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

Where to Put the Restraint

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at

General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in a rear seat. Never put a rear

facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat.

Here’s why:

CAUTION:

A child in a rear

facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags.

This is because the back of the rear

facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear

facing child restraint in a rear seat.

You may secure a forward

facing child restraint in the right front seat, but before you do, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle

--

even when no child is in it.

1-45

Top Strap

Anchor brackets for the rear outside seat positions are located on the floor in the cargo area.

yellow blue

Canadian law requires that forward

facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored.

If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored.

1-46

CAUTION:

Routing the top strap for a child restraint over or under the cargo security shade could cause the shade to come loose and even break. If this happens, the shade could be thrown about the vehicle in a collision or sudden maneuver. You or others could be injured. When anchoring a top strap to a cargo tiedown, be sure to remove the cargo security shade from your vehicle. See

“Cargo Security Shade” in the Index.

Don’t use the front set of tie

down brackets. Anchor the top strap to the rearmost bracket on the same side of the vehicle as the child restraint. If you need to have an anchor bracket installed for the center rear seat, you can ask your dealer to put it in for you. This work will be done for you free of charge. If you want to install the anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you how to do it.

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Outside Seat Position

yellow blue

You’ll be using the lap

shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

1-47

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.

1-48

yellow blue

yellow blue

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Rear Seat Position

5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward

facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.

1-49

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt.

2. Put the restraint on the seat.

3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward

facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

1-50

yellow blue

yellow blue

6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position

Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never put a rear

facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:

CAUTION:

A child in a rear

facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags.

This is because the back of the rear

facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear

facing child restraint in the rear seat.

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a forward

facing child restraint in the right front seat.

You’ll be using the lap

shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward

facing child restraint.

(See “Seats” in the Index.)

2. Put the restraint on the seat.

1-51

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-52

5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.

yellow blue

Larger Children

yellow blue

6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint.

You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.

Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap

shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

1-53

yellow blue

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly.

D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash.

D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are.

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.

Q:

What if a child is wearing a lap

shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck?

A:

Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see

“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.

If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.

1-54

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap

shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

1-55

Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.

Checking Your Restraint Systems

Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)

1-56

yellow blue

Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.

But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision.

If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.

NOTES

yellow blue

1-57

NOTES

1-58

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 2 Features and Controls

Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly

--

and what to do if you have a problem.

2

-

2

2

-

4

2

-

6

2

Keys

Door Locks

Keyless Entry System

2

-

11 Rear Doors

2

-

12 Theft

2

-

13 Theft

-

Deterrent System

2

-

16 Feature Customization

-

21 Passlock

2-

R

2

-

21 New Vehicle “Break

-

In”

2

-

22 Ignition Positions

2

-

23 Starting Your Engine

2

-

25 Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)

2

-

26 Automatic Transmission Operation

2

-

29 Four

-

Wheel Drive

2

-

33 Parking Brake

2

-

34 Shifting Into PARK (P)

2

-

36 Shifting Out of PARK (P)

2

-

37 Parking Over Things That Burn

2

-

38 Engine Exhaust

2

-

38 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked

2

-

39 Locking Rear Axle

2

-

39 Windows

2

-

41 Tilt Wheel

2

-

41 Multifunction Lever

2

-

47 Exterior Lamps

2

-

50 Interior Lamps

2

-

52 Mirrors

2

-

56 Storage Compartments

2

-

62 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

2

-

64 Universal Transmitter

2

-

67 OnStar

R

System (If Equipped)

2

-

68 The Instrument Panel

-

Your

2

Information System

-

70 Instrument Panel Cluster

2

-

72 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

2-1

Keys

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed.

They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-2

yellow blue

yellow blue

Your vehicle has one double

sided key for the ignition and all door locks.

If you ever lose your key, your dealer will be able to assist you with obtaining a new one.

Your vehicle also has a key that locks and unlocks the center floor console only.

Your vehicle also has an emergency key that operates the ignition and all door locks. Store the key in a safe place outside of the vehicle.

2-3

Door Locks

CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

Passengers

--

especially children

--

can easily open the doors and fall out. When a door is locked, the inside handle won’t open it.

Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.

This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

yellow blue

You can use the key, manual door locks, power door locks or keyless entry system.

To lock the door from the inside, slide the lever down.

To unlock the door, slide the lever up.

The manual switch on each door works only that door’s lock. It won’t lock (or unlock) all of the doors

--

that’s a safety feature.

To unlock the door from the outside, you can also use your key, but your vehicle has a theft

deterrent system.

If it is armed, unlocking and opening the door this way might set off the alarm. See “Theft

-

Deterrent System” in the Index.

2-4

Power Door Locks

Press the side of the power door lock switch marked

LOCK on either front door to lock all the doors at once.

yellow blue

On the passenger side of the rear panel door or tailgate, there is a power lock switch which can be used to lock or unlock all of the doors.

Press the ribbed side of the switch to unlock all the doors at once. The power door locks will operate at any time.

Operating the power locks may affect the theft

deterrent system. See “Theft

-

Deterrent System” in the Index.

On vehicles with panel doors, if the power lock switch is pressed with the panel doors open, all of the doors will lock three seconds after the panel doors are closed. If the panel doors are closed, the vehicle doors will lock when a power door lock switch is pressed. The theft

deterrent system will not re

arm after the panel doors are closed unless the power lock switch is pressed first.

2-5

Rear Door Security Locks

With this feature, you can lock the rear side doors so they can’t be opened from the inside by passengers.

Move the button up to engage the security feature. Move the button down to return the door locks to normal operation.

Lockout Prevention

This feature protects you from locking your key in the vehicle, by stopping the power door locks from locking when the key is in the ignition in OFF and a door is open.

If the power door lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition, none of the doors will lock.

See “Feature Customization” in the Index for further information on turning this feature on and off.

2-6

yellow blue

Leaving Your Vehicle

If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and close the door. For information on how to set the door locks, see “Theft

-

Deterrent System” and “Feature

Customization” in the Index.

Keyless Entry System

You can lock and unlock your doors, tailgate or panel doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.

Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS

-

210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to

30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

D Check to determine if battery replacement or transmitter resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions that follow.

D Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather.

D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.

yellow blue

Operation

The driver’s door will unlock automatically when

UNLOCK is pressed. If UNLOCK is pressed again within five seconds, the passenger’s doors will also unlock. All doors will lock when LOCK is pressed.

The tailgate or panel doors will unlock when the

REAR 2X button is pressed twice within five seconds, as long as the ignition is turned to OFF or the transmission is in PARK (P).

The system will turn on the interior lamps for about

40 seconds, when you unlock the doors, tailgate or panel doors. The interior lamps will go off when you lock the doors using the keyless entry transmitter or a power door lock switch. The interior lamps will also go off if the ignition is turned to RUN.

Operating the keyless entry transmitter may interact with the theft

deterrent system. See “Theft

-

Deterrent

System” in the Index.

2-7

Alarm/Panic Mode

The theft

deterrent system provides a fourth button on your transmitter. This button is the alarm/panic button.

If you are involved in a panic situation, press this button and your vehicle’s horn will sound and the headlamps will flash. This will draw needed attention to you and your vehicle. To turn this feature off, either push the panic button again or turn the ignition to RUN. The alarm will stop by itself after two minutes. This feature will not work if your ignition is on or if the transmitter is 30 feet (9 m) or more away from your vehicle.

Transmitter Verification

This feature provides feedback to the holder of the keyless entry transmitter that a command has been received by the keyless entry receiver. The headlamps and parking lamps will flash on every lock and unlock command and the horn will sound only if the LOCK button is pressed twice within five seconds. This allows for silent operation of locking and unlocking, unless a confirming horn chirp is desired. Other options may be selected for this feature (see “Feature Customization” in the Index).

yellow blue

Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle

Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.

If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it.

Have each transmitter you intend to match ready for the next steps. To match transmitters to your vehicle:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN, then to OFF. This will disarm the theft

deterrent system.

2. Remove the RADIO fuse (Fuse 17). This fuse is located in the main fuse block, which is located on the left side of your main instrument panel. When the fuse block is open, the radio fuse is located on the lower right corner of your instrument panel. See

“Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.

2-8

3. Turn the ignition from OFF to RUN three times quickly (within five seconds). The vehicle will respond by locking the doors, unlocking the driver’s doors and releasing the tailgate or panel doors. Your transmitter is now ready to match the vehicle.

4. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the first transmitter for 15 seconds. The vehicle will respond as in Step 3.

5. Repeat Step 4 for the remaining transmitters.

6. When you have finished matching all of your transmitters, replace the RADIO fuse (Fuse 17).

7. Check that all transmitters work by pressing their buttons.

If the transmitters don’t work, or if you’d rather not match the transmitters yourself, see your dealer.

yellow blue

Battery Replacement

Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery.

NOTICE:

When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.

Use one three volt, type CR2032, or equivalent battery.

2-9

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a small coin, or flathead screwdriver, to separate the bottom of the transmitter from the top.

2. Remove the battery and replace it with a new one, making sure the positive (+) side of the battery is facing down.

3. Snap the top and bottom together.

4. Test the operation of the transmitter with your vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, try synchronizing the transmitter with the receiver.

2-10

yellow blue

Resynchronization

Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security method used by this system. The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver will not respond to a signal it has been sent previously.

This prevents anyone from recording and playing back the signal from the transmitter.

To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your vehicle and simultaneously press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for at least eight seconds. The door locks should cycle and the parking lamps and headlamps should flash to confirm synchronization. If this does not happen, you may need to replace the battery in your transmitter or match the transmitter to your vehicle. If the locks still do not cycle, see your dealer for service.

Rear Doors

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the tailgate glass, tailgate or rear doors open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle.

You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.

If you must drive with the tailgate glass, tailgate or rear doors open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the tailgate glass, tailgate or rear doors:

D Make sure all other windows are shut.

D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed with the setting on VENT. That will force outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.

D If you have air outlets on or under the

instrument panel, open them all the way.

See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

yellow blue

Tailgate Glass and Tailgate (If Equipped)

If your vehicle has a tailgate, you must raise the rear glass before lowering the tailgate.

Use your key to open the glass from the outside. Then lift the glass up.

To release the glass from the inside, use the electric tailgate glass release switch on the instrument panel.

For more information, see “Tailgate, Glass Release” in the Index.

To open the tailgate, lift up on the handle while pulling the tailgate toward you.

Close the tailgate before closing the rear glass. After closing the tailgate, make sure the tailgate is securely latched by pulling it toward you. After closing the rear glass, pull up on its handle to make sure it is locked.

Panel Doors (If Equipped)

To open the rear panel doors, you must open the passenger’s side panel door first. If the door is locked, use your key to unlock it.

To open the passenger’s side panel door, pull up on the handle and pull the door open.

2-11

To open the driver’s side door, first open the passenger’s side panel door. Then, pull the handle on the left door edge outward and pull the door open.

The rear doors have a check assembly to keep them from fully opening during normal use.

To fully open either rear door, you must release the check strap. Use the following steps to release the check strap:

1. Open the door part way until the white mark on the check strap is fully outside the door edge. If the end of the strap catches the pin on the door, the door is open too far.

2. Then, hold the strap at the white mark, pull the strap toward you and open the door all the way.

To re

engage the door check strap, just close the door and the strap will catch the pin.

2-12

yellow blue

To close the doors, close the driver’s side door first.

After securely closing the door, close the passenger’s side door. Make sure both doors are latched securely.

To lock the rear doors from outside the vehicle, put your key in the lock and turn it clockwise. If you have power door locks, you can lock the side doors as well as the rear doors from inside the vehicle. For more information, see “Power Door Locks” in this section.

Theft

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.

Although your vehicle has a number of theft

deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.

Key in the Ignition

If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves

--

so don’t do it.

When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.

Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition and transmission. Also remember to lock the doors.

Parking at Night

Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.

Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.

Parking Lots

If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.

But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What if you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?

D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your glove box.

D Valuables can also be locked in the center floor console. Make sure that you take the console key with you.

D Take the remote keyless entry system transmitter with you.

D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.

yellow blue

Theft

-

Deterrent System

Your vehicle has a theft

deterrent alarm system. Once armed, the system will sound the horn and flash the parking lamps if the vehicle is tampered with.

Opening the doors may activate the alarm. See

“Disarming the System” later in this section for further information on turning the system off.

Shock Sensor

A shock sensor triggers the alarm when it detects a blow to your vehicle. It is located in the center floor console.

There are two levels of alarms via the shock sensor: two horn blasts and the headlamp/parking lamps flash for non

threatening blows to the vehicle or a full two

minute alarm for harder blows to the vehicle. The sensitivity can be adjusted if more or less is desired. If sensitivity is increased too much, it may give false alarms caused by gusts of wind or other natural events that may shake the vehicle.

2-13

The adjustment for the shock sensor sensitivity can be accessed through a hole in the forward wall of the main bin of the center floor console.

Using a small flat

tipped screwdriver, turn the adjuster clockwise to increase sensitivity and turn counterclockwise to decrease sensitivity. The shock sensor is ignored by the alarm system when the ignition is on, when the tailgate or panel doors are open, when the alarm is disarmed, when customized to be ignored and for five seconds after the horn sounds an alarm or chirp. The shock sensor is ignored after triggering three full alarms until the system is rearmed.

yellow blue

Arming the System

The alarm system can be armed to detect break

ins by locking your vehicle using the keyless entry or by locking the doors with the power door lock switch.

Passive arming is also available if you would like the system to arm all by itself after the doors have been closed, the ignition is OFF and the keys have been removed from the ignition. When the system is armed, a red light will flash on the center floor console briefly once every two seconds. If you return to your vehicle and the red light is flashing two brief flashes every two seconds, the system is armed and the shock sensor had triggered a two minute alarm. If the red light is flashing three times every two seconds, the system is armed and there was an intrusion that sounded the alarm.

Horn chirps and parking lamp flashes can be set to your choice. See “Feature Customization” in the Index.

2-14

Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Locking

If all the doors are closed, locking the vehicle with the transmitter will immediately arm the system. If any door is open when the transmitter LOCK button is pressed, the system goes into an armed wait mode, waiting for the doors to close. Once they are closed, the system will arm and the headlamps and parking lamps will flash. If the tailgate or panel doors are open or ajar at the time the system is arming, the headlamps and parking lamps flash once.

Power Door Lock Switch Locking

If any door is open when the power door lock switch is pressed, the system goes into an armed wait mode, waiting for the doors, tailgate or panel doors to close.

Once they are closed, the system will arm and the parking lamps will flash. If a door is closed when the power lock switch is pressed, the system assumes you are inside the vehicle, so it will not arm. Locking the doors by using the manual door locks will not arm the system.

yellow blue

Passive Arming

If the ignition was just turned off and a door was opened, the system will arm six seconds after the doors, tailgate or panel doors are closed. If a door is opened without the ignition being turned on, the system will wait 30 seconds after the doors, tailgate or panel doors are closed before arming. This provides time to get into the vehicle and put the key in the ignition. The parking lamps will flash when the system arms. Passive arming is not enabled from the factory.

If the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter or the power door lock switch is pressed, the system will arm immediately.

Disarming the System

There are two ways to disarm the system:

1. Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter. If the horn chirps two or three times when you unlock the vehicle, the alarm sounded in your absence. Two chirps means that the shock sensor was set off and three chirps means that a door, tailgate or the panel doors were opened.

2. Turn the ignition to RUN with the proper key.

For more information on customizing the features mentioned here, see “Feature Customization” in the Index.

2-15

Turning Off the Alarm

If you started the alarm by pressing the panic button on the keyless entry transmitter, you must either push that button again or turn the ignition to RUN to stop the alarm.

If the alarm is sounding due to the shock sensor or a door, tailgate or panel door opening, it can be turned off by either turning the ignition switch with a proper key inserted or by pressing any button on the keyless entry transmitter. If you use your keyless entry transmitter to silence the alarm, additional things will happen depending upon which button you press.

D Pressing the UNLOCK button will turn the alarm off, unlock the driver’s door and disarm the system.

D Pressing the LOCK button will turn the alarm off, keep the doors locked and keep the system armed.

D Pressing the REAR 2X button will turn the alarm off and disarm the system.

D Pressing the panic button will turn the alarm off, keep the doors locked and keep the system armed.

If the alarm is sounding because an incorrect ignition key was used, press any button on the keyless entry transmitter to turn the alarm off.

The alarm will stop by itself after two minutes.

2-16

Driver’s Door Alarm Delay

The alarm will sound eight seconds after the driver’s door is opened with your key.

Feature Customization

Your vehicle’s locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features. The following list tells you the features that can be programmed.

D Lockout Prevention

D Keyless Entry Verification

D Theft

-

Deterrent Arming Method

D Theft

-

Deterrent Arming Verification

To program features, your vehicle must be in the programming mode. Follow these steps:

1. Put your key in the ignition.

2. Turn the ignition to RUN to disarm the theft

deterrent system.

3. Turn the ignition to OFF.

yellow blue

4. Remove the RADIO fuse (Fuse 17). This fuse is in the main fuse block, located on the left side of your instrument panel. When the main fuse block is open, the RADIO fuse (Fuse 17) is located in the lower right corner side of the fuse panel. See “Fuses and

Circuit Breakers” in the Index.

5. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY.

You can now program your choices. After programming a feature, you can exit the programming mode at anytime.

You should hear two chimes to verify that the system is in programming mode. You will also be able to set

Lockout Prevention, Keyless Entry Verification, Arming

Method and Arming Verification.

Lockout Prevention

With this feature, the power door locks will not lock when the key is in the ignition in OFF and a door is open.

yellow blue

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.

Mode 1: Lockout Prevention Disabled (Doors will lock/unlock when you press the power door lock switch).

Mode 2: Lockout Prevention Enabled

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 2.

To change the mode:

1. Press the power lock switch on the door.

2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for.

3. Press the LOCK switch on the door until you hear the number of chimes that correspond to the mode selection you want.

The mode you select is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

2-17

Keyless Entry Verification

This means that when you use the keyless entry transmitter to lock/unlock your vehicle, your headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly when you press

LOCK once. Your horn will sound briefly and your headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly when you press LOCK a second time. Your headlamps and parking lamps will flash briefly when you press UNLOCK.

Programming Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.

Mode 1: All Off (The headlamps will not flash and the horn will not sound to provide you feedback that a lock/unlock command has been received by the keyless entry transmitter.)

Mode 2: Horn and Lamps/Lamps (Your horn will sound briefly and your headlamps and parking lamps will flash when you press LOCK on the keyless entry transmitter.

Only your headlamps and parking lamps will flash when you press UNLOCK.)

Mode 3: Horn and Lamps (Your horn will sound briefly and your headlamps and parking lamps will flash every time you push LOCK or UNLOCK.)

2-18

yellow blue

Mode 4: Lamps (Your headlamps and parking lamps will flash every time you press LOCK or UNLOCK.)

Mode 5: Lamps/Horn and Lamps/Lamps (Your headlamps and parking lamps will flash upon the first press on LOCK, your headlamps and parking lamps will flash and your horn will sound upon the second press on

LOCK and your headlamps and parking lamps will flash upon any press on UNLOCK.)

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 5.

To change the mode:

1. Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.

2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for.

3. Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter until you hear the number of chimes that correspond to the mode selection you want.

The mode you select is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

Theft-Deterrent Arming Method

This means that both your keyless entry transmitter and the power door lock switch will actively arm the system.

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.

Mode 1: Alarm System Off (The system will not arm.)

Mode 2: Keyless Entry Transmitter Lock (When you lock your doors using the keyless entry transmitter, the system will arm.)

Mode 3: Keyless Entry Transmitter/Power Door Lock

Switch (If you use either the keyless entry transmitter or the power door lock switch to lock the doors, the system will arm.)

Mode 4: Passive arming and Keyless Entry

Transmitter/Power Door Lock Switch Arming (The system will arm itself after all doors are closed, plus arming per Mode 3.)

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 3.

yellow blue

To change the mode:

1. Press the UNLOCK switch on the door.

2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for.

3. Press the UNLOCK switch on the door until you hear the number of chimes that correspond to the mode selection you want.

The mode you select is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle.

Theft-Deterrent Arming Verification

This programmable feature allows you to change horn and exterior lamp verification when arming and disarming the system.

2-19

Programmable Modes

Your vehicle can be programmed to one of the following modes.

Mode 1: All Off (No horn chirps or headlamps and parking lamps will flash.)

Mode 2: Horn and Lamps (Your headlamps and parking lamps will flash and your horn will chirp twice to verify the system is armed using any arming method.) Headlamps and parking lamps only will flash when disarming.

Mode 3: Horn and Lamps/Lamps (If you use the keyless entry transmitter to arm the system, your headlamps and parking lamps will flash and your horn will chirp twice to verify that the system is armed. If you use either the power door lock switch or passive arming, only your headlamps and parking lamps will flash for verification.) The headlamps and parking lamps will flash only when disarming.

Mode 4: Lamps (When your vehicle arms, only your headlamps and parking lamps will flash for verification.) The headlamps and parking lamps will flash only when disarming.

Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 3.

yellow blue

To change the mode:

1. Press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter.

2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for.

3. Press the LOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter until you hear the number of chimes that corresponds to the mode selection you want.

The mode you select is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program any of the previously mentioned features on your vehicle.

Leaving Programming Mode

When programming is done, turn the ignition to OFF and replace the RADIO fuse (Fuse 17).

2-20

yellow blue

Passlock

R

Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft

deterrent system.

Passlock is a passive theft

deterrent system. Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.

During normal operation, the SECURITY light will go off approximately five seconds after the key is turned to the RUN ignition position.

If the engine stalls and the SECURITY light flashes, wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine. Remember to release the key from START as soon as the engine starts.

If the engine is running and the SECURITY light comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off. However, your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer.

Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time.

You may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses and

Circuit Breakers” in the Index). See your dealer for service.

In an emergency, call the Cadillac Roadside Assistance

Center at 1

-

800

-

882

-

1112.

New Vehicle “Break

-

In”

NOTICE:

Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate

“break

in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:

D Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or

less for the first 500 miles (805 km).

D Don’t drive at any one speed

--

fast or slow

--

for the first 500 miles (805 km).

Don’t make full

throttle starts.

D Avoid making hard stops for the first

200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement.

Follow this breaking

in guideline every time you get new brake linings.

D Don’t tow a trailer during break

in.

See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more information.

2-21

Ignition Positions

CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed.

They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in the vehicle with children.

Use your key to start your vehicle. The key lets you turn the ignition switch to five different positions.

ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off. Push in the key and turn it toward you.

Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it was before you inserted the key.

LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering wheel and transmission. It’s a theft

deterrent feature.

You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK.

yellow blue

2-22

OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example, if your vehicle is being pushed).

RUN (D): This is the position for driving.

START (E): This position starts your engine.

NOTICE:

If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.

Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.

yellow blue

Retained Accessory Power

Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain features of your vehicle to continue to work up to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF.

Your audio system and power windows will work when the ignition key is turned to RUN or ACCESSORY.

Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF, these features will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.

Starting Your Engine

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

Your engine won’t start in any other position

--

that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

NOTICE:

Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

2-23

How to Start the Engine

1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm.

NOTICE:

Holding your key in START for longer than

15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about

15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.

2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in

START. If it doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the accelerator pedal all the way down for five more seconds, unless it starts sooner.

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), wait 15 seconds and start over.

When the engine starts, let go of the key and the accelerator pedal.

NOTICE:

Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly.

If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing

Your Vehicle” in the Index.

yellow blue

2-24

yellow blue

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110

volt AC outlet.

Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)

(

In very cold weather, 0

_F

-

18

_C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help.

CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three

prong

110

volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy

duty three

prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm

up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.

The engine coolant heater electrical cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment, near the power steering reservoir.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area.

2-25

Automatic Transmission Operation

There are several different positions for your shift lever.

Your vehicle features an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument cluster. This display must be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of PARK (P). This means that if your key is in OFF, rather than LOCK, there will be a small current drain on your battery which could discharge your battery over a period of time. If you need to leave your key in OFF for an extended period for any reason, it is recommended that you disconnect the battery cable from the battery to prevent discharging your battery.

yellow blue

PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.

CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.

You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).

See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you have four

wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to roll

--

even if your shift lever is in PARK (P)

--

if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear

--

not in

NEUTRAL. See “Four

-

Wheel Drive (Automatic

Transfer Case)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

2-26

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

NOTICE:

Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see

“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use

NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

CAUTION:

yellow blue

Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or

NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.

NOTICE:

Damage to your transmission caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.

2-27

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (

B): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you’re:

D Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.

D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down.

You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (

B) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off

road driving. You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (

B).

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use

SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on.

yellow blue

If you manually select SECOND (2), the transmission will drive in second gear. You may use this feature for reducing torque to the rear wheels when you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power

(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

NOTICE:

If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transmission.

Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transmission. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.

2-28

Four

-

Wheel Drive

Your vehicle has four

wheel drive. You can send your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four

wheel drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the section that follows before using four

wheel drive. You should use 2HI for most normal driving conditions.

NOTICE:

Driving in the 4HI or 4LO positions for a long time on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life of your vehicle’s drivetrain.

yellow blue

Front Axle Locking Feature

The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to lock or unlock is normal.

Automatic Transfer Case

2-29

The transfer case switches are below and to the left of the climate controls. Use these switches to shift into and out of four

wheel drive. You can choose among four driving settings:

2HI: This setting is used for driving in most situations.

Your front axle is not engaged in two

wheel drive. This setting also provides the best fuel economy.

yellow blue

AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in

AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent only to the rear wheels. When the vehicle senses a loss of traction, the system will automatically engage four

wheel drive. Driving in this mode results in lower fuel economy than 2HI.

4HI: Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off

road situations. This setting also engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle.

4LO: This setting also engages your front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never need 4LO. It sends maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose

4LO if you are driving off

road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.

CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before placing the transfer case in

NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake” in the Index.

2-30

NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to

NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See

“Recreational Vehicle Towing” or “Towing Your

Vehicle” in the Index for more information.

Indicator lights in the switches show which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting the transfer case. It will remain illuminated when the shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer case cannot make a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.

If the SERVICE 4WD light stays on, you should take your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service

4WD” in the Index for further information.

Shifting to 4HI or AUTO 4WD

Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD switch. This can be done at any speed, and the indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed.

Shifting to 2HI

Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at any speed.

yellow blue

Shifting to 4LO

To shift to 4LO, the vehicle’s engine must be running and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph

(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4LO switch. You must wait for the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear.

If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the transfer case will return to the setting last chosen.

Shifting Out of 4LO

To shift from 4LO to 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI your vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph

(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph

(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI, AUTO

4WD or 2HI switch. You must wait for the 4HI, AUTO

4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear.

2-31

If the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI, AUTO

4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission is in

NEUTRAL (N).

Shifting to NEUTRAL

To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Start the vehicle.

3. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.

4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.

6. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer case shift to

NEUTRAL is complete.

7. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift to AUTOMATIC

OVERDRIVE (

B) for one second.

yellow blue

8. Turn the ignition to OFF.

9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).

10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.

Shifting Out of NEUTRAL

To shift out of NEUTRAL:

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal.

2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off.

3. Press the button for the desired transfer case position (2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 4LO), the indicator lights will blink.

4. Start the engine within 30 seconds. The transfer case will shift to the desired position.

5. After the transfer case has shifted to the desired position, as indicated by a solid indicator light, you may shift the transmission to the desired position.

6. Release the parking brake.

2-32

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down. Pull the lever, located just above the parking brake pedal, marked BRAKE

RELEASE, to release the parking brake.

yellow blue

If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released, the brake system warning light will go off.

NOTICE:

Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

2-33

Shifting Into PARK (P)

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured.

To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. With four

wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to roll

--

even if your shift lever is in

PARK (P)

--

if your transfer case is in

NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear

--

not in NEUTRAL. See “Four

-

Wheel

Drive (Automatic Transfer Case)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:

yellow blue

D Pull the shift lever toward you.

2-34

D Move the lever up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear

--

not in NEUTRAL.

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

yellow blue

Leaving Your Vehicle With the

Engine Running

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. With four

wheel drive if your transfer case is in

NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear

--

not in

NEUTRAL. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to.

2-35

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”

To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into

PARK (P)” in the Index.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of

PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of PARK (P)

CAUTION:

Before shifting out of PARK (P) you must fully apply your regular brakes. Your vehicle can roll.

If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured.

If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

Your vehicle has a Brake

-

Transmission Shift Interlock

(BTSI) system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission” in the Index.

yellow blue

2-36

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then, move the shift lever into the gear you want.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the key to the OFF ignition position.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want.

5. Have the BTSI system fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Over Things That Burn

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn.

2-37

Engine Exhaust

CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:

D Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.

D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.

D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.

D Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or over road debris.

D Repairs weren’t done correctly.

D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle:

D Drive it only with all the windows down to

blow out any CO; and

D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-38

Running Your Engine While

You’re Parked

It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if ever you have to, here are some things to know.

CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under

“Engine Exhaust”).

Also, idling in a closed

in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust

--

with

CO

--

can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running.

Another closed

in place can be a blizzard.

(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)

yellow blue

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.

You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).

Four

wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear

--

not in

NEUTRAL. Always set your parking brake.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.

If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

yellow blue

Locking Rear Axle

Your locking rear axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with traction to move the vehicle.

Windows

Power Windows

The power window controls are located on each of the side doors.

2-39

The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger windows as well. Your power windows will work when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is present. See

“Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.

Push the rear of the switch with the power window symbol on it to lower the window.

Push the front of the switch with the power window symbol on it to raise the window.

The driver’s window switch has an express

down feature. Press and hold the side of the window switch marked AUTO for one second to activate the express

down mode. The express

down mode can be canceled at any time by pressing the opposite side of the switch. To open the window partway, lightly tap the switch until the window is at the desired position.

The power window switch has a lockout feature. This feature prevents the passenger windows from operating except from the driver’s position, when the front driver’s side switch is in LOCK. When the switch is moved to NORM, the passenger windows will operate again.

yellow blue

Electric Tailgate Glass Release

(If Equipped)

Before operating your electric tailgate glass release, see

“Rear Doors” in the the Index.

Your vehicle has the theft

deterrent system. If it is armed, use the transmitter, not the key to open the tailgate or the alarm will sound. The hatch switch will not work while the system is armed. See

“Theft

-

Deterrent System” in the Index.

The electric hatch release button lets you release the tailgate glass. To release the glass, press the top of the button.

Then, lift the window up to open.

The shift lever must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) for the release to work.

2-40

yellow blue

There is also a power door lock switch at the rear of the vehicle which will allow you to lock or unlock all of the doors. See “Power Doors Locks” in the Index.

Horn

Press the center of the steering wheel to sound the horn.

Tilt Wheel

A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive.

Multifunction Lever

You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.

The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your:

D Turn and Lane Change Signals

D Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer

D Windshield Wipers

D Windshield Washer

D Cruise Control

2-41

Turn and Lane Change Signals

The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.

When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.

An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.

yellow blue

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you.

Then release it.

When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument panel also will be on.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it.

If you move the lever all the way up or down and the arrow flashes at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers may not see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check for burned

out bulbs and a blown fuse (see “Fuses” in the Index).

2-42

Windshield Wipers

You operate the windshield wipers by turning the control with the wiper symbol on it located on the multifunction lever.

For a single wiping cycle, turn the control to MIST.

Hold it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the control on MIST longer.

You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the control to choose the delay time. The closer to LOW, the shorter the delay.

For steady wiping at low speed, turn the control to the

LOW position. For high

speed wiping, turn the control further, to HIGH. To stop the wipers, turn the control to OFF.

Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. See

“Windshield Wipers, Blade Replacement” in the Index.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. The windshield wiper motor is protected from overload by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools. Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using your windshield wipers.

Windshield Washer

At the top of the multifunction lever, there’s a paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle.

CAUTION:

yellow blue

In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.

Washer fluid will spray as long as you push the paddle.

When you let go of the paddle, the wipers will continue to wipe for a few seconds and then either stop or return to the preset speed.

The use of hood

mounted air deflectors may adversely affect windshield wiper and washer performance.

2-43

Rear Window Wiper and Washer (If Equipped)

The rear window wiper/washer switch is on your instrument panel, to the right of the gage cluster.

yellow blue

The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the front windshield washer. If the fluid level is low in the washer fluid bottle, you may not be able to wash your rear window. If you can wash your windshield, but not your rear window, check the fluid level.

Cruise Control

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about

25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator.

To turn the wiper on, slide the switch all the way up.

For delayed wiping, slide the switch even with DELAY in the center position of the rear wiper control. The wiper will cycle every nine seconds.

To wash the window, push in on the switch. Window washer fluid will continue to spray until the switch is released. The wiper will continue with three more wipes and then return to the setting that was chosen before the lever was pushed.

This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, cruise control shuts off.

2-44

CAUTION:

D Cruise control can be dangerous where you

can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.

D Cruise control can be dangerous on

slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control switch on when you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use it.

yellow blue

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the cruise control switch from ON to

R/A (Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second.

You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there.

If you hold the switch at R/A longer than half a second, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.

2-45

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.

Push the SET button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.

D Move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A.

Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A for less than half a second. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control

There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control:

D Push in the SET button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.

D To slow down in very small amounts, push the SET button for less than half a second. Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

2-46

yellow blue

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.

When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. If the steepness of the hill causes the vehicle speed to drop more than 15 mph (24 km/h) below the set speed, your cruise control will automatically disengage. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

D Step lightly on the brake pedal or

D Move the cruise control switch to OFF.

Erasing Speed Memory

When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

Your parking/headlamp knob is on the driver’s side of your instrument panel.

yellow blue

Turn the knob clockwise, to the parking lamp symbol, to turn on the following:

D Parking Lamps

D Sidemarker Lamps

D Taillamps

D License Plate Lamps

D Instrument Panel Lights

Turn the knob clockwise again, to the master lighting symbol, to turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.

Turn the knob counterclockwise, to OFF, to turn off your lamps. For additional information on headlamp operation, see “Headlamp Delay” in the Index.

Turn the thumbwheel next to the knob up to adjust instrument panel lights. Turn the thumbwheel up to the first notch to return the radio display and gearshift indicator LED display to full intensity when the headlamps or parking lamps are on. To turn on the dome lamps (with the vehicle doors closed) turn the thumbwheel up to the second notch position.

You can switch your headlamps from high to low beam by pulling on the turn signal/high

beam lever.

2-47

Automatic Headlamp System

When it is dark enough outside, your automatic headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the normal brightness along with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument panel lights.

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is off. Then start the vehicle. The automatic headlamp system will stay off until you release the parking brake.

The headlamp switch can always be used to turn on the regular lamps. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it.

Headlamps-On Reminder

A chime will sound when your headlamps are turned on and your ignition is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY.

Daytime Running Lamps

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.

DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.

yellow blue

The DRL system will make your headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when:

D the ignition is on,

D the headlamp switch is off,

D the parking brake is released and

D it is bright enough outside and the automatic headlamps are off.

When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.

The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.

Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either.

When it begins to get dark, your DRL will turn off.

Your headlamps will come on automatically.

When it begins to get bright, the regular lamps will go off, and your headlamps will change to the reduced brightness of DRL.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it.

2-48

Fog Lamps

Your vehicle has fog lamps. Use them for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking lamps and/or low

beam headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work.

The fog lamp switch is located to the right of the instrument panel cluster.

yellow blue

Fog lamps will go off whenever your high

beam headlamps come on. When the high

beams are off, the fog lamps will come on again.

Headlamp Delay

Your vehicle is equipped with a headlamp delay feature that holds the headlamps on for a short period of time after the ignition is turned off.

Press the ribbed top part of the switch to turn the fog lamps on. Press the bottom of the switch to turn them off. An indicator light will illuminate in the switch when the fog lamps are on.

Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turning on your headlamps.

The HEADLAMP DELAY button is located on the lower left side of the inside rearview mirror.

2-49

The length of time that the headlamps stay on after the ignition is turned off can be adjusted by pressing and holding the HEADLAMP DELAY button. The delay can be varied in five steps (0, 15, 30, 60 and 90 seconds). When the HEADLAMP DELAY button is held in, the Light Emitting Diode (LED) on the mirror will show five step changes in brightness. When the

LED is at its brightest the headlamp delay will be

90 seconds, and when it is most dim the delay will be zero seconds.

Interior Lamps

Instrument Panel Intensity Control

The instrument panel intensity control is located next to the parking/headlamp switch. Turn the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel lights. Turn the thumbwheel up to the first notch to return the radio display and gear shift indicator LED display to full intensity when the headlamps or parking lamps are on.

To turn on the dome lamps (with the vehicle doors closed) turn the thumbwheel up to the second notch position.

yellow blue

Exit Lighting and Delayed Illumination

With this feature, your interior lamps will come on and stay on for up to 25 seconds when entering the vehicle and up to five seconds when leaving your vehicle.

When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will only come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the out position. When all doors are closed the lamps will stay on for a short period of time and will then fade out. If the DOME OVERRIDE button is pressed in, the dome lamps will not illuminate.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamps will come on when you open the doors.

You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning the thumbwheel, located next to the parking/headlamps switch knob, all the way up to the second notch. In this position, the dome lamps will remain on whether the doors are opened or closed.

2-50

Reading Lamps

yellow blue

Your vehicle has reading lamps. Press the button next to the lamp to turn the lamp on.

You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located below the parking/headlamp knob, to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when the doors are opened, or remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the button to the “in” position. With the button in this position, the dome lamps will remain off when the doors are open. To return the lamps to automatic operation, press the button again and return it to the “out” position.

With the button in this position, the dome lamps will come on when you open the door.

The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction you want.

Press the button again to turn the lamp off.

Battery Rundown Protection

This feature shuts off the dome, courtesy, vanity, reading, glove box and underhood lamps if they are left on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition is off.

This will keep your battery from running down.

2-51

Mirrors

Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror with Compass, Temperature Display and

Headlamp Delay

Your vehicle has electrochromic inside and outside rearview mirrors. Your vehicle also has a headlamp delay feature. See “Headlamp Delay” in the Index for more information.

When on, an electrochromic mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.

yellow blue

The mirror also includes an eight

point compass display in the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven.

The display can also be used to indicate outside air temperature.

2-52

Temperature Display

The temperature can be displayed by pressing the TEMP switch. Pressing the TEMP switch once briefly will toggle the temperature reading on and off. To alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius, press and hold the TEMP switch for about eight seconds until the display shows only F

_ or C_. Press and release the TEMP switch to toggle between the Fahrenheit and

Celsius readings. After five seconds of inactivity, the display will return to normal in the temperature scale you have selected.

The normal display will show a temperature reading in degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius. If an abnormal reading is displayed, please consult your dealer.

Electrochromic Mirror Operation

The TEMP side of the switch, located at the bottom of the mirror, also turns the electrochromic inside and outside mirrors on and off. An indicator light, located to the right of the TEMP switch, will come on when the electrochromic mirrors are turned on. To turn the mirrors on, press and hold the TEMP switch for about

15 seconds. The mirrors will darken and remain dark until the button is released. To turn the mirrors off, press and hold the TEMP switch for about 15 seconds.

yellow blue

Compass Operation

Press the COMP switch once briefly to turn the compass on or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the compass will show two character boxes for approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display the compass heading.

Cleaning the Mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Compass Calibration

If, after five seconds, the display does not show a compass heading (“N” for North, for example), there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item. If the letter “C” should ever appear in the compass window, the mirror may need calibration.

2-53

yellow blue

The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways:

D Drive the vehicle in two circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction, or

D Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after several turns the compass will become calibrated and will display a direction.

Compass Variance

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.

It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.

Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance cross

country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance, your compass could give false readings.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Press and hold the COMP switch, located at the bottom of the mirror, for three seconds until a zone number appears in the display.

2. Find your current location and variance zone number on the following zone map.

3. Press the COMP switch on the bottom of the mirror until the new zone number appears in the display.

After you stop pressing the switch in, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.

2-54

Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors

The electric mirrors can be adjusted to point where you want from inside the vehicle.

Select the mirror you want to move by rotating the center of the switch, located on the driver’s door armrest, to L (left) or R (right).

yellow blue

Electrochromic Heated Outside

Rearview Mirrors

The outside rearview mirrors feature auto

dimming and defrost modes.

To turn on the auto

dimming feature, press and hold the

TEMP button on the inside rearview mirror for about

15 seconds. See “Electrochromic Rearview Mirror with

Compass, Temperature Display and Headlamp Delay” in the Index for further information.

To turn on the defrost feature, press the rear window defrost button. See “Rear Window Defogger” in the

Index for further information.

Then, adjust the mirror angle by pressing the outer arrows on the switch until the mirror is adjusted where you want it. The center position turns the electric mirrors off.

The mirrors can also be folded forward or rearward.

To fold the mirror, push forward or rearward on the mirror head.

2-55

Convex Outside Mirror

Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat.

CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are.

If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

yellow blue

Storage Compartments

Your vehicle has a variety of storage compartments designed to store small items.

Glove Box

To open your glove box, move the release button toward the passenger’s side and pull the door open.

Center Overhead Console

Your vehicle has an overhead console. It has a storage compartment inside it. Your vehicle also has a universal transmitter. See “Universal Transmitter” in the Index.

Rear Compartment

The rear compartment can be used to store a small item, like a book.

To open the rear compartment, press the release button located at the rear of the compartment door.

2-56

Instrument Panel Cupholder

Your vehicle has a cupholder in the middle of the instrument panel.

To use the cupholder, pull the handle and slide the cupholder tray open.

yellow blue

Center Floor Console

Your vehicle has a console compartment between the bucket seats.

To close the cupholder, slide it back into the instrument panel.

To open it, insert the console key into the lock and unlock the console. Press the button in and swing the console lid upward.

The console key is for use on the storage compartment only.

The console has a small storage bin covered by a lid.

When open, the lid provides a writing surface.

2-57

The console has two cupholders and two storage trays for the front passenger and driver to use.

Your console also has a cupholder that swings down for the rear seat passengers to use.

The console also contains the following components:

D Rear Seat Audio System Controls

D Rear Heated Seat Switches

D Rear Seat Accessory Power Outlet

D Six

-

Disc CD Changer

D Subwoofer

D Audio Amplifier

yellow blue

D Shock Sensor Adjuster

D LED (Light Emitting Diode) Theft

-

Deterrent

System Indicator

For more information on these components, please see the Index for that item.

Rear Armrest Storage Compartment

Your vehicle has a center armrest storage compartment in the rear seat.

Other Storage Compartments

Your vehicle includes a number of storage compartments for storage of often

used items.

Your vehicle has a storage pocket on each of the front doors.

You can use the pocket to store a variety of small items.

Convenience Net

Your vehicle has a convenience net, which is used to keep small loads, like grocery bags, in place during sharp turns or quick starts and stops.

The net is not designed for larger, heavier loads.

It is stored in a pouch attached at the driver’s side of the vehicle. You can also unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you’re not using it.

2-58

Cargo Security Shade

CAUTION:

An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver. You or others could be injured. If you remove the cover, always store it outside of the vehicle. When you put it back, always be sure that it is securely reattached.

yellow blue

To use the shade:

1. Pull the shade handle toward the rear of the vehicle.

2. Latch the shade posts into the retaining sockets on the cargo area trim panels.

To return the shade to the shade holder:

1. Pull up on the shade handle to release the shade posts from the retaining sockets.

2. Let the shade move forward and latch the shade posts into the front

most retaining sockets.

To remove the shade from the vehicle:

1. Let the shade go all the way into the holder.

2. Push the shade holder toward the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

3. Lift the shade up on the driver’s side.

4. Swing the shade rearward and take it out of the vehicle.

Your vehicle has a cargo security shade. You can use it to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.

2-59

yellow blue

6. Push the shade holder toward the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

7. Place the tab in the driver’s side trim panel slot.

Make sure the tab goes all the way in the slot.

8. Lightly pull on the shade holder to make sure it is secure.

9. Pull the shade to the desired position and secure the shade posts in the appropriate retaining sockets.

Cargo Tie Downs

There are cargo tie downs in the rear cargo area that allow you to strap cargo in and keep it from moving inside the vehicle.

To put the shade in the vehicle:

1. Make sure the shade slot in the holder faces rearward with the round surface facing down.

2. Hold the shade at an angle.

3. Place the shade holder tab into the slot in the passenger’s side trim panel.

4. Move the other end of the shade forward.

5. Hold it next to the driver’s side trim panel slot.

When not using the tie downs, flip them down out of the way.

2-60

Luggage Carrier

Your vehicle has a luggage carrier, which you can use to load things on top of your vehicle.

The luggage carrier has slats and side rails attached to the roof, and crossrails which can be moved toward the front or the rear in the side rails to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the tie loops or crossrails.

NOTICE:

Loading cargo that weighs more than 200 lbs.

(90.6 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage your vehicle. When you carry large things, never let them hang over the rear or the sides of your vehicle. Load your cargo so that it rests on the slats and does not scratch or damage the vehicle.

Put the cargo against the side rails and fasten it securely to the luggage carrier.

Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.

yellow blue

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving, check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.

Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.

D If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, place the load in the area over the rear wheels. If you need to, cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails and side rails to spread the load.

D Tie the load to the crossrails or the side rail supports.

Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding.

D If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the crossrails and tie loops. Also tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so tightly that the crossrails or side rails are damaged.

D For the purpose of wind noise reduction, locate the front crossrail approximately 18 to 24 inches (46 cm to 58 cm) rearward of the front supports.

D After moving the crossrails, be sure to tighten all the slider screws.

Your vehicle has a Center High

-

Mounted Stoplamp

(CHMSL) located above the tailgate glass or above the rear load doors.

If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.

2-61

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

Front Ashtray

The front ashtray is located at the bottom of the instrument panel. Pull on the notch in the ashtray door to open it.

yellow blue

Rear Door Ashtrays

To use a rear ashtray, flip the lid open.

To remove a rear ashtray, open the lid and pull the ashtray assembly upward.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let go. When it’s done heating, it will pop back by itself.

NOTICE:

If you store paper or other things that burn in your ashtrays, they could be set on fire by cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle. Do not store papers and other things that burn in your ashtrays.

NOTICE:

Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating can make it overload, damaging the lighter and the heating element.

Just push the lighter all the way in and let go.

When it’s done heating, it will pop back by itself.

To remove the front ashtray, press the retainer spring and pivot the ashtray toward you. To replace the ashtray, place the bottom part of the ashtray on the pivot bar at the bottom of its mounting on the instrument panel.

Then rotate the ashtray back to its original position.

2-62

Accessory Power Outlets

Two auxiliary power outlets are located near the cigarette lighter. Use these outlets to power mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems.

yellow blue

One auxiliary power outlet is located at the rear of the center floor console, for rear seat passengers to use.

Another auxiliary power outlet is located in the rear cargo area on the passenger’s side.

2-63

yellow blue

Sun Visors

To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.

You can also swing them out to help block glare at the front and side windows.

Your visors have a strap to hold small items, such as maps.

The visors have an extender on the inside edge. When the visor is down, pull the extender out for extra glare coverage at the front or side.

The visors also have mirrors with lights. The lights will come on when you lift the mirror cover.

Universal Transmitter

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS

-

210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.

2-64

Programming the Transmitter

Do not use the universal transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse” feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door you are programming.

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to program up to three channels:

1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down the two outside buttons on the universal transmitter until the indicator light begins to flash rapidly (after

20 seconds). Then release the buttons. This procedure initializes the memory and erases any previous settings for all three channels.

2. Decide which one of the three channels you want to program. Hold the end of the hand

held transmitter about 2 to 5 inches (5 to 13 cm) away from the surface of the universal transmitter so that you can still see the indicator light.

yellow blue

3. Using both hands, press the hand

held transmitter button and the desired button on the universal transmitter. Continue to press both buttons through

Step 4.

4. Hold down both buttons until you see the red light on the universal transmitter flash rapidly. The rapid flashing indicates that the universal transmitter has been programmed. Release both buttons once the light starts to flash rapidly.

If you have trouble programming the universal transmitter, make sure that you have followed the directions exactly as described and that the battery in the hand

held transmitter is not dead. If you still cannot program it, rotate the hand

held transmitter end over end and try again. The universal transmitter may not work with older garage door openers that do not meet current

Federal Consumer Safety Standards. If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated attempts, refer to

“Training a Garage Door Opener with Rolling Codes” later in this section or contact the manufacturer of the unit at 1

-

800

-

355

-

3515 or Cadillac Customer

Assistance (1800

-

458

-

8006 in the United States)

(1

-

800

-

263

-

3777 in Canada).

Be sure to keep the original hand

held transmitter in case you need to erase and reprogram the universal transmitter.

2-65

Note to Canadian Owners: During programming, the hand

held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after one or two seconds. In this case, you should press and re

press the button on the hand

held transmitter every two seconds without ever releasing the button on the universal transmitter. Release both buttons when the indicator light on the universal transmitter begins to flash rapidly.

Operating the Transmitter

Press and hold the appropriate button on the universal transmitter. The indicator light comes on while the signal is being transmitted.

If the hand

held transmitter appears to program the universal transmitter but does not open your garage door, and if the garage door opener was manufactured after 1996, the garage door opener may have a “rolling code” system. A rolling code system changes the code of the garage door opener every time you open or close the garage door.

To determine if you have this system, press the button on the universal transmitter that you have programmed already. If the indicator light flashes rapidly for one to two seconds, then turns solid, the garage door opener has a rolling code system. In a rolling code system, the garage door motor head unit must be trained to the universal transmitter.

2-66

yellow blue

Training a Garage Door Opener with a

“Rolling Code” Feature (If Equipped)

If you have not previously programmed the hand

held transmitter to the universal transmitter, see

“Programming the Transmitter” listed previously. If you have completed this programming already, you now need to train the garage door opener motor head unit to recognize the universal transmitter. Refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual for the proper transmitter training procedure for your garage door opener brand.

1. Find the training button on the garage door opener motor head unit. The exact location and color will vary by garage door opener brand. If you have difficulty finding the training button, refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual.

2. Press the training button on the garage door opener motor head unit. An indicator light will begin to flash when the motor head unit enters the training mode.

Note: Following this step, you have 30 seconds to start Step 3.

3. Return to the universal transmitter in your vehicle and firmly press and release the universal transmitter button you have already programmed for two to three seconds. Press and release the button again

(you may need to do this step up to three times) to make sure that the universal transmitter has been trained to the garage door opener motor head unit.

Check that the training was successful. The motor head unit indicator light should no longer be flashing.

The garage door opener should now recognize the universal transmitter. You may either use the universal transmitter or the hand

held transmitter to open the garage door.

If after following these instructions, you still have problems training the garage door opener, call the manufacturer of the unit at 1

-

800

-

355

-

3515 or

Cadillac Customer Assistance (1

-

800

-

458

-

8006 in the United States) (1

-

800

-

263

-

3777 in Canada).

yellow blue

Erasing Channels

To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.

Accessories

Accessories for the universal transmitter are available from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like additional information, please call 1

-

800

-

355

-

3515.

OnStar

R

System (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with the OnStar System.

To operate the OnStar System, please consult the user’s guide provided with the system.

2-67

The Instrument Panel

-

Your Information System

yellow blue

2-68

A. Dome Override Switch

B. Lamp Controls

C. Air Outlets

D. Multifunction Lever

E. Instrument Panel Cluster

F. Gearshift Lever

G. Rear Window Wiper Washer Switch (If Equipped)

H. Audio System

I. Comfort Control System

J. Glove Box

K. Ashtray

yellow blue

L. Cupholder

M. Auxiliary Power Outlets

N. Compact Disc Player

O. Electric Tailgate Glass Release (If Equipped)

P. Fog Lamp Switch

Q. Automatic Transfer Case Switch

R. Tilt Lever

S. Parking Brake Release

T. Hood Release

U. Fuse Block

2-69

Instrument Panel Cluster

United States version shown, Canadian similar

Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.

2-70

yellow blue

Speedometer and Odometer

Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers

(used in Canada).

Tamper

-

Resistant Odometer

Your odometer is tamper

resistant. The odometer will show silver lines between the numbers if someone tries to turn it back.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. Laws vary as to the procedure that must be followed, so check with your state or provincial vehicle registration office. But generally, if the new odometer can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed.

yellow blue

Trip Odometer

The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.

To reset the trip odometer, fully press the reset button located near the trip odometer readout. If the reset button is not fully pressed, the trip odometer may not go all the way back to zero. If it doesn’t, you may have to press the reset button again to reset the readout to zero.

Tachometer

Your tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

NOTICE:

If you operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, your engine or other parts could be damaged.

Damage to your engine or vehicle caused by operating the engine in the red area isn’t covered by your vehicle warranty. Don’t operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area.

2-71

Warning Lights, Gages and

Indicators

This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle.

yellow blue

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.

Waiting to do repairs can be costly

--

and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.

Safety Belt Reminder Light

When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds, then it will flash for about

55 seconds.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on.

2-72

Air Bag Readiness Light

There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.

For more information on the air bag system, see “Air

Bag” in the Index.

This light will come on when you start your engine, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready.

After the engine starts, the light should go out. If it stays on or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with your charging system. It could indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some other charging system problem. Have it checked right away.

Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with this light on, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and the air conditioner.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.

The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

yellow blue

Charging System Warning Light

The charging system warning light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, before starting the engine, as a check to show you it is working.

2-73

Voltmeter

When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in the RUN position, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in DC volts.

When the engine is running, the gage shows the condition of the charging system. Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range.

Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create maximum power.

yellow blue

You can only drive for a short time with the reading in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all unnecessary accessories.

Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

Brake System Warning Light

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully.

If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.

2-74

This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.

It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.)

CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.

yellow blue

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light

With the anti

lock brake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and may stay on for several seconds.

That’s normal.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti

lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti

lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See

“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section.

The anti

lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-75

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(Service Engine Soon Light)

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems.

yellow blue

It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is working. During a majority of the operation, the gage will read 210

_F (100_C) or less. If you are pulling a load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 260

_F (160_C) mark. If the gage reaches the 260

_F (160_C) mark, it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.

The “Problems on the Road,” section of this manual shows what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

This system is called OBD II (On

-

Board

Diagnostics

-

Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

2-76

NOTICE:

If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly.

This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.

NOTICE:

Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria

(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.

yellow blue

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.

This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

D Light Flashing

--

A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.

D Light On Steady

--

An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.

Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.

If the Light Is Flashing

The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle:

D Reducing vehicle speed.

D Avoiding hard accelerations.

D Avoiding steep uphill grades.

D If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

2-77

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,

stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.

Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light

Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service.

If the Light Is On Steady

You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

yellow blue

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see

“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start

up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)

This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed.

2-78

Oil Pressure Gage

The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi

(pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.

Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned.

Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.

Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.

A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or other problem causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible.

NOTICE:

Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.

2-79

Security Light

This light will come on briefly when you turn the key to START.

yellow blue

Service Four-Wheel Drive Warning Light

Your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic

Four

-

Wheel

-

Drive Transfer Case. It has a computer which controls the four

wheel

drive system.

This light should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, as a check to show you it is working.

The light will stay on until the engine starts. If the light flashes, the Passlock

R

System has entered a tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see “Passlock” in the Index.

If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock

System. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock, and you should see your Cadillac dealer.

If the SERVICE 4WD light comes on, there may be a problem with the Automatic Four

-

Wheel

-

Drive system and service is required. Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent, which may prevent serious damage to the vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction.

2-80

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Indicator Light

This light will turn on whenever the DRL are on.

When it begins to get dark, the DRL indicator light will turn off and your automatic headlamps will turn on.

Check Gages Light

This light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine.

yellow blue

If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving, it could indicate a problem with your vehicle. It could be a problem with your oil pressure, coolant temperature, or some other problem. Check your various gages to see if they are in the warning zones. If they are, have your vehicle serviced right away.

Headlamp High-Beam Indicator Light

The high

beam indicator is on whenever you use your high

beam headlamps. For more details about high beams, see “Headlamp

High/Low

-

Beam Changer” in the Index.

2-81

Turn Signal and Lane Change

Indicator Lights

The signal indicator will come on whenever you signal a turn or lane change.

See “Turn and Lane Change

Signals” in the Index.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left in your tank.

yellow blue

Listed are four situations you may experience with your fuel gage:

D At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads F (Full).

D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

D The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up.

D The gage doesn’t go back to E (Empty) when you turn off the ignition.

None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.

For information on how to fill your fuel tank, see “Fuel,

Filling Your Tank” in the Index.

For your fuel tank capacity, see “Fuel, System Capacity” in the Index.

The gage will first indicate E (Empty) before you are out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.

2-82

NOTES

yellow blue

2-83

NOTES

2-84

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems

In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.

3

-

2

3

-

3

3

-

4

3

-

4

3

-

5

3

-

6

3

-

6

3

-

7

3

-

7

3

-

8

Comfort Controls

Rear Air Conditioning

Air Conditioning

Heating

Ventilation System

Defogging and Defrosting

Rear Window Defogger

Audio Systems

Setting the Clock

AM

-

FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

3

-

12 CD Adapter Kits

3

-

12 Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

3

-

14 Remote Compact Disc Player

3

-

16 Console

-

Mounted CD Changer

3

-

18 Theft

-

Deterrent Feature

3

-

20 Understanding Radio Reception

3

-

20 Tips About Your Audio System

3

-

21 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

3

-

22 Care of Your Compact Discs

3

-

22 Fixed Mast Antenna

3-

3-1

Comfort Controls

Heater and Air Conditioning

Control System

Fan Knob

The knob on the left side of the heating system control panel controls the fan speed. The knob has four speed positions. To increase airflow, turn the knob toward HI.

To decrease airflow, turn it toward LO. To turn the fan off, move the knob to OFF. If you have the air conditioner on, turning the fan knob to OFF also turns off the A/C compressor.

yellow blue

In OFF, while driving, air will flow through the floor outlets. The mode knob will not redirect the airflow to other selected outlet positions. This is normal operation for the OFF position.

Temperature Knob

The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the relative temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area of your vehicle. This knob will allow you to adjust the relative air temperature independently of the function knob setting. Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air.

Mode Knob

The right knob on the control panel allows you to choose the direction of air delivery. The control knob can be placed in any position between any two mode settings to blend the flow of air.

VENT: This setting directs air through the instrument panel outlets.

3-2

yellow blue

VENT/HEAT: Use this setting to divide airflow between the floor outlets and instrument panel outlets.

HEATER: This setting directs air through the floor outlets.

DEFOG: This setting directs air to the heater outlets and toward the windshield.

DEFROST: This setting directs air toward the windshield.

Rear Air Conditioning

You can increase and decrease the airflow at the rear vents. You can also send cooled air to the rear of the vehicle.

Your vehicle has rear air conditioning (without rear heater). The controls are located above the front and rear seats. The front and rear overhead controls let you increase and decrease the airflow at the rear vents.

To operate the rear air conditioning system, the front air conditioning system must be on. With the front air conditioning system off, the rear system controls can be used to circulate air in the rear of the vehicle.

To operate the rear system using the front control, just turn the knob to the blower position you want.

To use the rear control, first turn the front control knob to REAR CNTL. Then, the rear control can be used to increase and decrease the airflow.

3-3

Air Conditioning

On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot air inside escape. This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best.

The recirculation button, between the fan and temperature knobs, allows the air inside your vehicle to be recirculated. This setting helps to maximize your air conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel economy. This setting also cools the air the fastest and can be used to keep unwanted odors and/or dust from entering the vehicle. When using the air conditioner, turn off recirculation after the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior temperature. When the right knob on the control panel is between HEATER and

DEFROST, the recirculation feature will not function.

The A/C button, between the temperature and mode knobs, allows the air coming into your vehicle to be cooled. This setting is useful for normal cooling on hot days. When you use A/C with the recirculation button pushed in, turn off recirculation as soon as the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior temperature.

yellow blue

With the A/C on, move the temperature knob to MAX for maximum cooling. This setting also puts the system in the recirculation mode and helps to maximize your air conditioner’s performance and your vehicle’s fuel economy. This setting also cools the air the fastest. After the vehicle’s interior reaches a comfortable temperature, move the temperature knob to the right to place the air conditioning system in the normal mode.

Heating

The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it. On cold days, use the HEATER or

VENT/HEAT setting with the temperature knob in the red area.

If you use the engine coolant heater before starting your engine in cold weather, 20

_F (

-

8

_C) or lower, your heating system will produce warmer air faster, to heat the passenger compartment in cold weather.

The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the time it takes for the engine to reach normal operating temperature, and shortens the time it takes the heater to reach full output. For more information, see “Engine

Coolant Heater” in the Index.

3-4

Ventilation System

For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air through your vehicle. Air will flow through the instrument panel outlets.

Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With the side windows closed, air will flow into the front air inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and out the air exhaust valves.

Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater or the air conditioning fan is running, unless you have the recirculation button pushed in. For more information on the recirculation button, see “Air Conditioning” earlier in this section.

yellow blue

Your vehicle has air outlets in the center and on the sides of your instrument panel.

You can move the outlets from side

to

side or up and down to direct the flow of air, or close the outlets altogether. When you close an outlet, it will increase the flow of air coming out of any outlets that are open.

These outlets do not completely shut off airflow when in a closed vent position.

3-5

Ventilation Tips

D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater and defroster will work far better, reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the blower fan to HI for a few moments before driving.

This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle.

D The use of hood air deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the heating and air conditioning system.

yellow blue

Defogging and Defrosting

On cool, humid days, use DEFOG to keep the windshield and side windows clear. Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the windshield in extremely humid or cold conditions. Use DEFROST with the temperature knob toward the red area and the fan control toward HI.

Rear Window Defogger

The lines you see running across the rear window, are the rear window defogger. The lines warm the glass.

To turn on the rear window defogger press this button next to the fan control knob.

The rear window defogger will only work if the ignition switch is turned to

RUN. For best results, first clear the window of as much snow or ice as possible.

3-6

The defogger will shut itself off after several minutes.

If you need additional warming time, press the button again. You can turn the defogger off at any time by pressing the button.

The rear window defogger button will activate the rear window defogger and the heated outside rearview mirrors.

Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window.

NOTICE:

Don’t use a razor blade or anything else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

yellow blue

Audio Systems

Your Cadillac audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Setting the Clock

Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears on the display. To display the clock with the ignition off, press RECALL or HR/MN and the time will be displayed for a few seconds. There is an initial two

second delay before the clock goes into the time

set mode.

3-7

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

Included with the AM

Player are six Bose

R

-

FM Stereo with Cassette Tape

high performance speakers, an

Acoustimass

R

bass module and a seven channel Bose amplifier. Please see your dealer for details.

Playing the Radio

PWR

-

VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is capable of being rotated continuously.

yellow blue

REAR DSPL: When the main radio is turned on, press this button to turn on the rear seat audio display on the main radio. Press it again to turn the rear seat audio display off.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press this button to recall the station frequency.

SCV: Your system has a feature called

Speed

-

Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,

SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive.

If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

3-8

Finding a Station

AM

-

FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until

SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press the button again. The sound will mute while scanning.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to

18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM

-

FM to select the band.

yellow blue

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.

Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

P. SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons. Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then press

P. SCAN. It will scan through each station stored on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons. Press

P. SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning to listen to a specific preset station. P. SCAN will light up on the display while in this mode. If one of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for the location you are in, the radio display will show the channel number (P1

-

P6) for several seconds before advancing to the next preset station.

3-9

Setting the Tone

BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass.

TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.

Adjusting the Speakers

BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.

Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.

3-10

yellow blue

Playing a Cassette Tape

Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.

To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press

EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.

If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will begin playing.

Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, BAL, FADE,

BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio.

The tape symbol and a direction arrow will be on the display whenever a tape is being played. Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for play first.

The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is metal or CrO

2

and adjusts for best playback sound.

For metal tapes, the double

-

D symbol will appear on the display.

PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum three

second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.

PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side of the tape to the other.

NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK right arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum three

second blank gap is required for the player to stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. The sound will mute while searching for the next selection.

REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV again. The radio will play the last selected station while reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink during the reverse operation.

D (5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.

The double

-

D symbol will appear on the display while the player is in this mode.

Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double

-

D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again.

The radio will play the last selected station while forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink during the forward operation.

yellow blue

AM

-

FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to the radio.

TAPE AUX: Press this button if you have a tape loaded in the cassette tape player and the radio is turned on, to play a tape. Press AM

-

FM to return to the radio when a tape is playing. Press TAPE AUX to switch between the tape player and console

mounted CD changer if both are loaded. When a tape is playing, a lighted arrow will appear on the display and show the direction of play.

(If the radio is turned off, the tape stays in the player and will resume playing at the point where it stopped.)

EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape.

The radio will now play. EJECT can be used with either the ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading the cassette.

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of

Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display

---

to show the indicator was reset.

3-11

yellow blue

CD Adapter Kits

It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player.

To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.

4. Insert the adapter. It will power up the radio and begin playing.

This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources, including AM

-

FM, cassette tapes and CDs, through the Rear Seat Audio

(RSA) controller. However, the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources that the front seat passengers are not listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape through headphones while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones. Be aware that the front seat audio controls always have priority over the RSA controls. Note that if the front seat passengers switch the source for the main radio to a remote source, the RSA will play the same remote source.

3-12

The rear speakers will be muted when the RSA power is turned on. You may operate the RSA functions even when the main radio is off.

Note that this feature is intended for rear seat passengers.

The following function is controlled by the knob on the main radio:

PWR

-

VOL: Push this knob twice to turn RSA off.

The following functions are controlled by the RSA system buttons:

PWR: Press this button to turn RSA on or off.

VOL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume and counterclockwise to decrease volume. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it.

The upper VOL knob controls the upper headphone and the lower VOL knob controls the lower headphone.

AM

-

FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening to

AM

-

FM, the RSA controller will not switch between the bands and cannot change the frequency.

yellow blue

SEEK: While listening to AM

-

FM, press the up arrow to tune to the next higher station and stay there. Press the down arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking. The SEEK button is inactive if the AM

-

FM mode on the front radio is in use.

While listening to a cassette tape, press the up arrow to hear the next selection on the tape. Press the down arrow to go back to the previous selection. The SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use.

While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the next selection on the CD. Press the down arrow to go back to the start of the current selection (if more than eight seconds have played). The SEEK button is inactive in the CD mode if the remote CD player or the CD changer is in use.

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK until the radio goes into

SCAN mode. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station until you press SEEK again. The SCAN function is inactive if the AM

-

FM mode on the front radio is in use.

3-13

P.SET PROG: The front passengers must be listening to something different for each of these functions to work:

D Press this button to seek through the preset radio stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.

D When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to go to the other side of the tape.

D When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this button to select a disc.

TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between the tape, remote CD and console

mounted CD changer if all are loaded. Press AM

-

FM to return to the radio when a cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

Remote Compact Disc Player

yellow blue

To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with the label side up and insert it carefully into the player

(approximately halfway). The disc will automatically be pulled into the player. If the radio is off and the ignition is on when a CD is inserted, the radio will turn on and begin playing the CD. It is possible to load and unload

CDs with the ignition off. To load a disc with the ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.

A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the remote CD player will be pulled back into the player after approximately 30 seconds. This protects the disc and player from damage. The disc will not start playing.

To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.

All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a disc is playing, the letters CD will appear next to the

CD symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will also be displayed.

You can play one compact disc (CD) at a time with the remote compact disc player.

3-14

If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the display, it could be that:

D The disc is upside down.

D It is dirty, scratched or wet.

D There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about an hour and try again.)

D You are driving on a very rough road.

Please contact your dealership if any error recurs or cannot be corrected.

PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press

PREV again to go to the previous track on the disc.

NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next track on the disc.

REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.

SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to go back to the start of the current track. It will go back to the current track if more than eight seconds have played.

yellow blue

Press the left arrow again to go to previous tracks. Press the right arrow to go to the next higher track on the disc.

RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enter the random play mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in this mode, the tracks on the disc will be played in random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT while in the random mode, the previous or next track will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn off RANDOM and return to normal operation.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is currently playing. Press RECALL again within five seconds to see how long the track has been playing.

When a new track starts to play, the track number will also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time of day will be displayed.

TAPE AUX: With a disc loaded in the player and the radio playing, press this button twice to play the remote compact disc. To return to playing the radio, press

AM

-

FM. If the cassette tape player, remote CD player and console

mounted CD changer are all loaded, press

TAPE AUX to switch between the tape, remote CD and

CD changer.

EJECT: Press this button on the remote player to eject a compact disc.

3-15

Console-Mounted CD Changer

With the compact disc changer, you can play up to six discs continuously. Normal size discs may be played using the slots supplied in the magazine.

You must first load the magazine with discs before you can play a compact disc. Load the CDs from bottom to top, placing the discs in the magazine label side up. If you load a disc label side down, the disc will not play and an error will occur. Repeat this procedure for loading up to six discs in the magazine.

Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on the magazine.

3-16

yellow blue

Close the door by sliding it all the way forward. When the CD magazine is loaded, the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine. This will continue for up to one and a half minutes, depending on the number of discs loaded.

To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD changer door all the way open, then press EJECT.

Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer.

Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer, the CD changer symbol will appear on the radio display. If the CD changer is checking the magazine for

CDs, the CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play. When a CD begins playing, a disc and track number will be displayed. The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine.

All of the CD changer functions are controlled by the radio buttons, except for ejecting the CD magazine.

PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to go to the previous track if the current selection has been playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button is pressed and the current selection has been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current selection. If you hold or press this button more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.

yellow blue

PROG (2): Press this button to select a disc. The disc number and track number will be displayed.

NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.

REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.

FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.

SEEK: Press the right arrow to seek to the next selection on the CD. Press the left arrow to search for the previous selection on the CD. The sound will mute while seeking.

P.SCAN: Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on the display. Press P.SCAN again to turn off random play.

TAPE AUX: Press this button three times if you have a disc loaded in the changer and the radio is turned on, to play a compact disc. Press AM

-

FM to return to the radio when a compact disc is playing. Press TAPE AUX to switch between the tape, remote CD and console

mounted CD changer if all are loaded.

3-17

Compact Disc Changer Errors

If ERR appears on the display, it could be that:

D You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc should play when the road gets smoother.)

D A disc is upside down.

D It is dirty, scratched or wet.

D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.)

D The disc player is very hot.

D The CD changer door is open. Completely close the changer door to restore normal operation.

D An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer.

Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the trays.

Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, please contact your dealer.

yellow blue

Theft-Deterrent Feature

THEFTLOCK

R

is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed.

The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.

When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display

LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate.

Activating the Theft

-

Deterrent Feature

The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure.

NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.

3-18

1. Write down any three or four

digit number from

000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.

3. Turn the radio off.

4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until

---

shows on the display. Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down.

5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.

6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.

7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.

8. Press AM

-

FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.

The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code.

9. Press AM

-

FM and this time the display will show

SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The

LED indicator by the volume control will begin flashing when the ignition is turned off.

yellow blue

Unlocking the Theft

-

Deterrent Feature After a

Power Loss

Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than

15 seconds between steps:

1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.

2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.

3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.

4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.

5. Press AM

-

FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.

The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is now operable and secure.

If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again. When you try again, you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears.

If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.

3-19

Disabling the Theft

-

Deterrent Feature

Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than

15 seconds between steps:

1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until SEC shows on the display.

4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.

5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.

6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.

7. Press AM

-

FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.

The display will show

---

, indicating that the radio is no longer secured.

If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered.

When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display.

yellow blue

To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the

Theft

-

Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section.

Understanding Radio Reception

AM

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.

FM Stereo

FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go.

Tips About Your Audio System

Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it.

3-20

To help avoid hearing loss or damage:

D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.

D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly.

NOTICE:

Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle

--

like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two

way radio

--

be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly.

So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units.

yellow blue

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player.

Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every

50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.

The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action, non

abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.

The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).

3-21

When using a scrubbing action, non

abrasive cleaning cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the following steps.

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time.

When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape detection feature is active again.

You may also choose a non

scrubbing action, wet

type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own. A non

scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.

The use of a non

scrubbing action, dry

type cleaning cassette is not recommended.

yellow blue

After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display

---

to show the indicator was reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced.

Care of Your Compact Discs

Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Fixed Mast Antenna

The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should replace it.

Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the cowl.

3-22

NOTES

yellow blue

3-23

NOTES

3-24

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road

Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving.

4

-

2

4

-

3

4

-

6

4

-

6

Defensive Driving

Drunken Driving

Control of a Vehicle

Braking

4

4

-

9 Steering

-

11 Off

-

Road Recovery

4

-

12 Passing

4

-

13 Loss of Control

4

-

14 Off

-

Road Driving with Your

Four

-

Wheel

-

Drive Vehicle

4

-

27 Driving at Night

4

-

28 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

4

-

31 City Driving

4

-

32 Freeway Driving

4

-

33 Before Leaving on a Long Trip

4

-

34 Highway Hypnosis

4

-

34 Hill and Mountain Roads

4

-

36 Winter Driving

4

-

40 Recreational Vehicle Towing

4

-

41 Loading Your Vehicle

4

-

43 Towing a Trailer

4-

4-1

Defensive Driving

The best advice anyone can give about driving is:

Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)

yellow blue

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”

On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means

“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear

end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task

--

such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the floor

--

makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.

Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.

4-2

Drunken Driving

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle:

D Judgment

D Muscular Coordination

D Vision

D Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle

related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor vehicle

related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults

--

by some estimates, nearly half the adult population

--

choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.

There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws.

yellow blue

The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things:

D The amount of alcohol consumed

D The drinker’s body weight

D The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking

D The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a 180

lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12

ounce

(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a

BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4

ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1

-

1/2 ounces

(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.

4-3

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s

BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men.

yellow blue

Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks.

The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of

0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching

0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.

All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above

0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a

BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is

25 times greater!

4-4

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?

A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking

--

driver or passenger

--

is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.

Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious

--

or even fatal

--

collision if you drive after drinking.

Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.

4-5

Control of a Vehicle

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.

yellow blue

Braking

Braking action involves perception time and

reaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.

That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).

That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle.

4-6

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts

--

heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking

--

rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.

yellow blue

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)

Your vehicle has anti

lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to drive away, your anti

lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on. This is normal.

If there’s a problem with the anti

lock brake system, this warning light will stay on.

See “Anti

-

Lock Brake

System Warning Light” in the Index.

4-7

The anti

lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions.

yellow blue

Here’s how anti

lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.

You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you.

You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels.

You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

4-8

Remember: Anti

lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti

lock brakes.

Using Anti

-

Lock

Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti

lock work for you. You may feel the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but this is normal. Your anti

lock brakes work at all times four

--

whether you are in two

wheel drive or

wheel drive.

Braking in Emergencies

With anti

lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking.

Steering

Power Steering

If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.

yellow blue

Speed-Sensitive Steering

This system varies the amount of steering effort proportionate to your vehicle speed. Steering is easier at lower speeds for maneuvering and parking ease. As your vehicle speed increases, the steering effort also increases. At highway speeds, the amount of steering effort is increased for vehicle control and stability.

Steering Tips

Driving on Curves

It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.

4-9

The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.

Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems

--

steering and acceleration

--

have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead.

yellow blue

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking

--

if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s the time for evasive action

--

steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in

Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available.

4-10

yellow blue

Off

-

Road Recovery

You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.

You can turn the steering wheel up to one

quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.

Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

4-11

Passing

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two

lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two

lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents

--

the head

on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.

D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.

If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass

(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

4-12

yellow blue

D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a

“running start” that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity.

D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.

Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot.

D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that if your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.)

D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two

lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.

D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.

Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn.

D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control

Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.

In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

yellow blue

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not

“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited.

4-13

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.

You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues

--

such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface”

--

and slow down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti

lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid.

Off

-

Road Driving with Your

Four

-

Wheel

-

Drive Vehicle

This off

road guide is for vehicles that have four

wheel drive.

Also, see “Anti

-

Lock Brakes” in the Index.

Off

road driving can be great fun. But it does have some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself.

“Off

roading” means you’ve left the great North

American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.

Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill. In short, you’ve gone right back to nature.

4-14

yellow blue

Off

road driving involves some new skills. And that’s why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help make your off

road driving safer and more enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-Roading

There are some things to do before you go out. For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and service work done. Check to make sure all underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure you read all the information about your four

wheel

drive vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are the local laws that apply to off

roading where you’ll be driving? If you don’t know, you should check with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the necessary permission.

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving

There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle.

D The heaviest things should be on the load floor and forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward as you can.

D Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on the off

road terrain doesn’t toss things around.

CAUTION:

D Cargo on the load floor piled higher than

the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop. You or your passengers could be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks.

D Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be

tossed about when driving over rough terrain. You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.

D Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s

center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.

Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible.

You’ll find other important information in this manual.

See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires” in the Index.

yellow blue

Environmental Concerns

Off

road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation. However, it also raises environmental concerns. Cadillac recognizes these concerns and urges every off

roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment:

D Always use established trails, roads and areas that have been specially set aside for public off

road recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.

D Avoid any driving practice that could damage the environment

--

shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses

--

or disturb wildlife (this includes wheel

spinning, breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground).

D Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving.

D Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.

D Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.

4-15

Traveling to Remote Areas

It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.

You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any blocked or closed roads.

It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other can help quickly.

Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving

It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness.

Off

road driving does require some new and different driving skills. Here’s what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands, feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.

4-16

yellow blue

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off

road driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:

D you approach things faster and you have less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.

D you have less time to react.

D you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over obstacles.

D you’ll need more distance for braking, especially since you’re on an unpaved surface.

CAUTION:

When you’re driving off

road, bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control and crash. So, whether you’re driving on or off the road, you and your passengers should wear safety belts.

Scanning the Terrain

Off

road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its many different features. Here are some things to consider.

Surface Conditions. Off

roading can take you over hard

packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering, acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on, you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking distances.

Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle you if you’re not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:

D Is the path ahead clear?

D Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?

D Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?

(There’s more discussion of these subjects later.)

D Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly?

yellow blue

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if you’re not prepared.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s especially important to avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns or sudden braking.

In a way, off

road driving requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.

There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment about what is safe and what isn’t.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road. And this is certainly true for off

road driving. At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious

--

or even fatal

--

accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.

See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.

4-17

Driving on Off-Road Hills

Off

road driving often takes you up, down or across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do.

There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.

CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.

If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive down them, you can’t control your speed. If you drive across them, you will roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.

yellow blue

Approaching a Hill

When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s one of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you may not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider as you approach a hill.

D Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places?

D Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface cause tire slipping?

D Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you won’t have to make turning maneuvers?

4-18

yellow blue

D Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?

D What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment, a drop

off, a fence? Get out and walk the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way to find out.

D Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.

Driving Uphill

Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you need to take some special steps.

D Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel.

D Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain your speed. Don’t use more power than you need, because you don’t want your wheels to start spinning or sliding.

D Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If the path twists and turns, you might want to find another route.

CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills, always try to go straight up.

D Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of the hill.

D Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

D Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you’re there.

D Use your headlamps even during the day. They make you more visible to oncoming traffic.

4-19

CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can cause an accident. There could be a drop

off, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You could be seriously injured or killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.

Q:

What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?

A:

If this happens, there are some things you should do, and there are some things you must not do.

First, here’s what you should do:

D Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.

D If your engine is still running, shift the transmission to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).

yellow blue

D If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to

PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to

REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE (R).

D As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you back down the hill with your wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or are about to stall, when going up a hill.

D Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into

NEUTRAL (N) to “rev

up” the engine and regain forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you could go out of control.

4-20

yellow blue

Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to

REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly back straight down.

D Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up the hill, you must back straight down the hill.

Q:

Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the hill and decide I just can’t do it. What should

I do?

A:

Set the parking brake, put your transmission in

PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.

Leave it in some gear.

CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P). This is because the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case overrides the transmission. You or someone else could be injured. If you are going to leave your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift the transmission to

PARK (P). But do not shift the transfer case to the NEUTRAL position. Leave the transfer case in the 2 Wheel High, 4 High or 4 Low position.

Driving Downhill

When off

roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to consider a number of things:

D How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control?

D What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?

Hard

packed dirt? Gravel?

4-21

D Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?

Logs? Boulders?

D What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.

CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause loss of control and a serious accident.

Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control.

yellow blue

Q:

Are there some things I should not do when driving down a hill?

A:

Yes! These are important because if you ignore them you could lose control and have a serious accident.

D When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.

You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.

D Never go downhill with the transmission in

NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free

wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade.

Q:

Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A:

It’s much more likely to happen going uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.

D Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.

Apply the parking brake.

D Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart the engine.

D Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight down.

D If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.

4-22

Driving Across an Incline

Sooner or later, an off

road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some things to consider:

D A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when you drive across an incline, the much more narrow track width (the distance between the left and right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels.

This could cause a downhill slide or a rollover.

D Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.

If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.

yellow blue

D Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.

CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that’s too steep will make your vehicle roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline, don’t drive across it. Find another route instead.

4-23

Q:

What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to slide downhill. What should I do?

A:

If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a much better way to prevent this is to get out and

“walk the course” so you know what the surface is like before you drive it.

Stalling on an Incline

If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline, be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you’ll be right in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.

Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.

yellow blue

4-24

yellow blue

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice

When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need longer braking distances.

It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud

--

the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t get stuck.

When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly when driving on sand. This will improve traction.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.

On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide out of control.

CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only.

Driving in Water

Light rain causes no special off

road driving problems.

But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drive through it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or exhaust pipe, don’t try it

--

you probably won’t get through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle and other vehicle parts.

4-25

If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly.

At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your engine. When you go through water, remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.

CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.

Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it’s only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive through rushing water.

yellow blue

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleaned and checked. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to off

road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule booklet for additional information.

See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more information on driving through water.

4-26

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.

One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired

--

by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

yellow blue

Here are some tips on night driving.

D Drive defensively.

D Don’t drink and drive.

D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles.

D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

D In remote areas, watch for animals.

D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.

Night Vision

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50

year

old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20

year

old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible.

4-27

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean

--

inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness

--

the inability to see in dim light

--

and aren’t even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

yellow blue

4-28

yellow blue

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire

to

road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.

And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking.

It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too.

The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.

But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

4-29

CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.

This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

NOTICE:

If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips

D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray.

D Have good tires with proper tread depth.

(See “Tires” in the Index.)

4-30

yellow blue

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals.

yellow blue

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

D Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross

country trip.

D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)

D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.

When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.

4-31

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too

fast or too

slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

4-32

yellow blue

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your

“blind” spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you’re not fresh

--

such as after a day’s work

--

don’t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts in

Cadillac dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.

yellow blue

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?

Are all windows clean inside and outside?

D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels?

D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble

free trip. Is the tread good enough for long

distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure?

D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?

D Maps: Do you have up

to

date maps?

4-33

Highway Hypnosis

Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?

Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior.

D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your instruments frequently.

D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

4-34

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain.

yellow blue

yellow blue

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. (See “Off

-

Road

Driving” in the Index for information about driving off

road.)

D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transmission. These parts can work hard on mountain roads.

D Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill.

CAUTION:

If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.

CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill.

You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.

D Stay in your own lane when driving on two

lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.

D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.

D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no

passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

4-35

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle.

4-36

yellow blue

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or Ice

Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful.

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about freezing (32

_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.

Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

yellow blue

Whatever the condition or loose snow

--

smooth ice, packed, blowing

--

drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.

If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.

Your anti

lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have an anti

lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See “Anti

-

Lock” in the Index.

D Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.

D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.

Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

4-37

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

yellow blue

D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow.

D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.

If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats

--

anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

D Turn on your hazard flashers.

4-38

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.

This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.

yellow blue

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well

charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes.

4-39

Recreational Vehicle Towing

There may be times when you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for use at your destination. Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational vehicle towing. Follow the instructions for the towing equipment.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P), for an automatic transmission.

You or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL.

yellow blue

4-40

yellow blue

Use the following procedure to correctly tow your vehicle on all four wheels:

1. Firmly set the parking brake.

2. Place the transmission in PARK (P).

3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle.

4. With the engine running, shift the transfer case to

NEUTRAL. See “Four

-

Wheel Drive” in the Index for the proper procedure to select the neutral position for your vehicle.

5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.

6. Turn the ignition to OFF. The OFF position unlocks the steering column and reduces battery drain.

Unlocking the steering column will allow the proper movement of the front wheels and tires during towing.

Loading Your Vehicle

The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver’s door.

4-41

yellow blue

The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the

GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.

CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear

GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading.

If you put things inside your vehicle

--

like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else

--

they go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

4-42

CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

D Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.

Try to spread the weight evenly.

D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,

inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.

D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in

your vehicle.

D When you carry something inside the

vehicle, secure it whenever you can.

D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you

need to.

There’s also important loading information for off

road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for

Off

-

Road Driving” in the Index.

yellow blue

Towing a Trailer

CAUTION:

If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well

--

or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured.

Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

4-43

NOTICE:

Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this part, and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle may be able to tow a trailer. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the

Trailer” that appears later in this section.

If yours was built with trailering options, as many are, it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.

Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time

tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.

Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.

4-44

yellow blue

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer

If you do, here are some important points:

D There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police.

D Consider using a sway control if your trailer will weigh less than the capacity stamped on your step bumper. You should always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh more than the capacity stamped on your step bumper. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.

D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

D You should tow in OVERDRIVE (B). You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

D the weight of the trailer,

D the weight of the trailer tongue

D and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

The trailer should never weigh more than 6,000 lbs.

(2 722 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.

yellow blue

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your

Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading

Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

4-45

If you’re using a weight

carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you’re using a weight

distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

yellow blue

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires

Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the

Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

Hitches

It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.

Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

D If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will weigh more than the capacity stamped on your step bumper, be sure to use a properly mounted, weight

distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you’re driving.

D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?

If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the

Index). Dirt and water can, too.

4-46

Safety Chains

You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.

Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.

Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) loaded, then it needs its own brakes

--

and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

yellow blue

Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system only if:

D The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi

(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

D The trailer’s brake system will use less than

0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.

If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.

4-47

Driving with a Trailer

CAUTION:

If you have a rear

most window open and you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide

(CO) could come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness or death. (See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.) To maximize your safety when towing a trailer:

D Have your exhaust system inspected for

leaks, and make necessary repairs before starting on your trip.

D Keep the rear

most windows closed.

D If exhaust does come into your vehicle

through a window in the rear or another opening, drive with your front, main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed. This will bring fresh, outside air into your vehicle. Do not use the recirculation button or MAX because it only recirculates the air inside your vehicle.

(See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.)

4-48

yellow blue

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.

Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform

(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.

Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns

yellow blue

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.

Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

NOTICE:

Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.

4-49

yellow blue

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.

You should tow in AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (

B).

You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).

When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while parked (preferably on level ground) with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get the overheat warning, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

Parking on Hills

CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into

PARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).

5. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear

--

not in NEUTRAL.

6. Release the regular brakes.

4-50

CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.

Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.

If the transfer case on four

wheel drive vehicles is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear

--

not in NEUTRAL.

yellow blue

When You Are Ready to Leave After

Parking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you:

D Start your engine;

D Shift into a gear; and

D Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule booklet for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.

If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

4-51

Trailer Wiring Harness

Light

-

Duty Wiring Harness

Additional Heavy

-

Duty Wiring

yellow blue

4-52

An eight

wire harness is stored under the rear bumper of your vehicle. The five

wire light

duty harness is located at the left rear inner lower quarter panel. The additional heavy

duty wiring is located forward of the rear bumper and is attached to the center of the rear crossmember or the forward vertical surface of the platform hitch.

This harness has a 30 amp battery feed wire and no connector, and should be wired by a qualified electrical technician. After choosing an aftermarket mating connector pair, have the technician attach one connector to the eight

wire trailer harness and the other connector to the wiring harness on the trailer. Be sure that the wiring harness on the trailer is strapped to the trailer’s frame and leave it loose enough so that the wiring doesn’t bend or break, but not so loose that it drags on the ground. The technician can use the following color code chart when connecting the wiring harness to your trailer.

yellow blue

D Brown: Rear Lamps

D Yellow: Left Stoplamp and Turn Signal

D Dark Green: Right Stoplamp and Turn Signal

D White (Heavy Gauge): Ground

D Light Green: Back

up Lamps

D White (Light Gauge): Center High

-

Mounted

Stop Lamp

D Blue: Auxiliary/Electric Trailer Brake Circuit

D Orange: Fused Auxiliary Circuit

Store the harness in its original place. Wrap the harness together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.

4-53

NOTES

4-54

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 5 Problems On The Road

Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.

5

-

2

5

-

2

5

-

3

5

-

8

5

-

8

Hazard Warning Flashers

Other Warning Devices

Jump Starting

Towing Your Vehicle

Engine Overheating

5

5

-

11 Cooling System

5

-

18 Engine Fan Noise

5

-

18 If a Tire Goes Flat

5

-

19 Changing a Flat Tire

-

32 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-

5-1

Hazard Warning Flashers

yellow blue

Press the button on the top of the steering column all the way down to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off.

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.

To turn off the flashers, push the button until the first click and release.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work.

Other Warning Devices

If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.

5-2

Jump Starting

If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. But please use the following steps to do it safely.

CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:

D They contain acid that can burn you.

D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.

D They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

The ACDelco Freedom

R

battery in your vehicle has a built

in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12

volt battery with a negative ground system.

5-3

NOTICE:

If the other system isn’t a 12

volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL (N). Be sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL.

yellow blue

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save your radio!

NOTICE:

If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the positive (+) and negative (

-

) terminals on each battery.

5-4

CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t need to add water to the ACDelco Freedom

R

battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.

Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.

yellow blue

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.

The vehicles could be damaged, too.

Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (

-

) will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (

-

) or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too.

CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.

5-5

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery.

5-6

7. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.

yellow blue

8. Now connect the black negative (

-

) cable to the good battery’s negative (

-

) cable.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (

-

) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part of the vehicle with the dead battery.

yellow blue

11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.

12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal.

9. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while.

A. Heavy Metal Engine Part

B. Good Battery

C. Dead Battery

5-7

Towing Your Vehicle

CAUTION:

To help avoid serious personal injury to you or others:

D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is

being towed.

D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.

D Never tow with damaged parts not

fully secured.

D Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by the tow truck.

D Always secure the vehicle on each side with

separate safety chains when towing it.

D Use only the correct hooks.

NOTICE:

Use the proper towing equipment to avoid damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas of the vehicle.

5-8

yellow blue

With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is essential that the correct towing equipment is used to tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel

lift equipment or car carrier equipment. The transfer case must be placed in NEUTRAL. The towing limits for wheel lift equipment are:

D Front Towing

--

55 mph (88 km/h) or legal speed limit and distance is unlimited

D Rear Towing

--

35 mph (55 km/h) for

50 miles (80 km)

Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside

Assistance” in the Index.

Engine Overheating

You will find a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant

Temperature Gage” in the Index.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

5-9

NOTICE:

If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

D Climb a long hill on a hot day.

D Stop after high

speed driving.

D Idle for long periods in traffic.

D Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.

yellow blue

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary.

3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving

--

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (

B).

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.

If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the

engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.

5-10

yellow blue

Cooling System

When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see:

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Radiator Pressure Cap

C. Engine Fan

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down.

The coolant level should be at or above the COLD mark.

If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

5-11

CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.

Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

NOTICE:

Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX

-

COOL

R

(silicate

free) coolant.

If coolant other than DEX

-

COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner

--

at

30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX

-

COOL

R

is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant

Recovery Tank

If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at or above the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX

-

COOL

R

engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine

Coolant” in the Index for more information.)

5-12

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant.

NOTICE:

In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-13

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or above the COLD mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.

CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap

--

even a little

--

they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

5-14

yellow blue

yellow blue

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.)

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

5-15

3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX

-

COOL

R coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.

(See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mixture.)

4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the

COLD mark.

5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

5-16

yellow blue

yellow blue

6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.

8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.

5-17

Engine Fan Noise

Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch more fully engages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not required and the clutch disengages.

You may also hear this fan noise when you start the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.

yellow blue

If a Tire Goes Flat

It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.

But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.

Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop

--

well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-18

yellow blue

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers.

CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured.

Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear

--

not in NEUTRAL.

4. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move, you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed.

That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire.

5-19

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

Your vehicle may have a pair of emergency gloves secured to the jack. You can use them when changing the tire, or during other emergency situations.

Remember to replace them with the jack, so you will have them if needed later.

The spare tire is stored under the vehicle in an underbody carrier.

yellow blue

The equipment you’ll need is located in the rear cargo area. The spare tire is located under the rear of the vehicle.

To open the jack cover, turn the wing nut counterclockwise and take the cover off.

To take the jack out, turn the wing

head bolt counterclockwise and take it and the retainer off.

Take the jack and storage box out and take the tools out of the box.

5-20

A. Hoist Assembly

B. Hoist Shaft

C. Ratchet

D. Jack Handle

E. Retainer

F. Valve Stem, Pointed Down

G. Spare Tire

yellow blue

Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire:

1. One side of the ratchet has an UP marking. The other side has a DOWN marking. Assemble the ratchet to the hook near the end of the jack handle (as illustrated) with the DOWN marking facing you.

Insert the other end through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft.

2. Turn the ratchet counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the ratchet until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle.

3. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through the wheel opening.

4. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A), the jack handle extension (B), the jack handle (C), the wheel wrench (D) and the ratchet (E).

The jack handle extension is used if the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle.

5-21

Attach the jack handle (and jack handle extension, if needed) to the jack.

UP Marking DOWN Marking

One side of the ratchet has an UP marking. The other side has a DOWN marking.

5-22

yellow blue

yellow blue

With the UP marking on the ratchet facing you, rotate the ratchet clockwise. That will lift the jack head a little.

To access the lug nuts, place the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry off the center piece to remove it.

5-23

yellow blue

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire

1. Use the ratchet and wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise, with DOWN facing you, to loosen the wheel nuts. Don’t remove the wheel nuts yet.

2. If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle, put the jack handle extension on the jack handle.

3. Position the jack under the vehicle. If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle, position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire. If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle, position the jack on the axle near the flat tire between the spring and the shock absorber.

5-24

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.

Front Position Rear Position

4. With UP on the ratchet facing you, raise the vehicle by rotating the ratchet and wheel wrench clockwise.

Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit.

5-25

5-26

5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

6. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident.

yellow blue

7. Mount the spare tire on the wheel mounting surface. Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel.

Tighten each wheel nut by hand with the wheel wrench until the wheel is held against the hub.

Front Position Rear Position

8. Lower the vehicle by rotating the ratchet and wheel wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

5-27

9. Tighten each wheel nut by rotating the wheel wrench clockwise.

5-28

10. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown.

Rotate the wheel wrench clockwise.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident.

Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.

Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to

140 lb

ft (190 N·m)

NOTICE:

Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.

yellow blue

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.

Store the flat tire where the spare tire is stored.

Put the tools into the storage box and close it tightly. Fit the storage box on the bracket with the bolt through the box. Put the jack onto the box. Be sure the jack is stored as shown in the following illustrations. The jack handle attachment point is circled in the following illustrations to show the direction the jack should face when it is stored properly. Secure the emergency gloves, if your vehicle has them, to the jack using the provided strap.

Slide the retainer over the bolt onto the jack and put the wing nut on it. Turn the nut clockwise until it is tight against the retainer.

5-29

Replace the jack storage cover by simply reversing the removal procedure described earlier.

A. Wheel Wrench

B. Jack Handle

C. Ratchet

Jacking Tool Storage

D. Jacking Tool Storage Box

E. Jack Handle Extension

A. Retainer

B. Nut

C. Jack

Jack Storage

D. Jack Storage Box

E. Bracket

5-30

yellow blue

A. Hoist Assembly

B. Hoist Shaft

C. Ratchet

D. Jack Handle

Spare Tire Storage

E. Retainer

F. Valve Stem, Pointed Down

G. Spare Tire

yellow blue

Follow these instructions to restore a spare or flat tire:

1. Lay the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle.

Position the tire so that the valve stem is pointed down and to the rear of the vehicle.

2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel opening. Make sure that the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel.

3. Attach the ratchet, with the UP mark facing you, near the hook at the end of the jack handle. Insert the other end, on an angle, through the hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft.

4. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle. Continue turning the ratchet clockwise until there are two “clicks” or “ratchets.” The spare tire hoist cannot be over

tightened.

5. Grasp and push against the tire to be sure it is stored securely and does not move.

5-31

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,

Ice or Snow

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution.

NOTICE:

Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transmission back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index.

CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

yellow blue

5-32

yellow blue

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. Shift the transfer case into 4HI. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

Using the Recovery Hooks

Your vehicle is equipped with recovery hooks. The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle.

You may need to use them if you’re stuck off

road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving.

5-33

5-34

CAUTION:

The recovery hooks, when used, are under a lot of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured from the chain or cable snapping back.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.

Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty.

yellow blue

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care

Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.

6

-

2

6

-

3

6

-

5

Service

Fuel

Fuels in Foreign Countries

6

-

5

6

-

8

Filling Your Tank

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

6

6

-

8 Checking Things Under the Hood

-

11 Engine Oil

6

-

15 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

6

-

17 Automatic Transmission Fluid

6

-

20 Rear Axle

6

-

21 Four

-

Wheel Drive

6

-

23 Radiator Pressure Cap

6

-

23 Thermostat

6

-

24 Engine Coolant

6

-

27 Power Steering Fluid

6

-

28 Windshield Washer Fluid

6

-

29 Brakes

6

-

33 Battery

6

-

33 Bulb Replacement

6

-

38 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

6

-

38 Tires

6

-

47 Appearance Care

6

-

47 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

6

-

49 Care of the Safety Belts

6

-

50 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle

6

-

54 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

6

-

55 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

6

-

55 Service Parts Identification Number Label

6

-

56 Electrical System

6

-

62 Replacement Bulbs

6

-

63 Capacities and Specifications

6

-

65 Air Conditioning Refrigerants

6

-

65 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

6-

6-1

Service

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and

GM

trained and supported service people.

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

yellow blue

Doing Your Own Service Work

If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air

Bag

-

Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Maintenance

Schedule booklet.

6-2

CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it.

D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,

experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task.

D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and

other fasteners. “English” and “metric” fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle

Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

yellow blue

Fuel

Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications which have been developed by the

American Automobile Manufacturers Association

(AAMA) and endorsed by the Canadian Motor

Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines. For more information, write to: American Automobile Manufacturer’s

Association, 7430 Second Ave, Suite 300,

Detroit MI 48202.

Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.

If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem.

6-3

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission

Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet

California specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog

check test. (See “Malfunction

Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to your authorized Cadillac dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane

enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing

MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized Cadillac dealer for service.

yellow blue

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system, allowing your emission control system to function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier.

NOTICE:

Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty.

6-4

yellow blue

Fuels in Foreign Countries

If you plan on driving in another country outside the

United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving.

You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Filling Your Tank

The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on the driver’s side of your vehicle.

6-5

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.

Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline.

While refueling, let the cap hang by the tether below the fuel filler neck.

To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left

(counterclockwise).

6-6

CAUTION:

If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned.

Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the

Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.

yellow blue

When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right

(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.

NOTICE:

If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.

6-7

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:

D Dispense gasoline only into

approved containers.

D Do not fill a container while it is inside a

vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground.

D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the

inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete.

D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Under the Hood

CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

yellow blue

6-8

yellow blue

Hood Release

To open the hood, first pull the handle inside the vehicle.

Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the secondary hood release, located just to the passenger’s side of the center of the grill.

Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly.

6-9

“VORTEC” 5700 V8 Engine

When you lift up the hood you’ll see:

A. Battery

B. Coolant Recovery Tank

C. Radiator Pressure Cap

D. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

E. Air Filter Restriction Indicator

6-10

F. Engine Oil Dipstick

G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick

H. Engine Cooling Fan

I. Engine Oil Fill

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

K. Brake Fluid Reservoir

L. Windshield Washer

Fluid Reservoir

M. Underhood Fuse/Relay Center

yellow blue

Engine Oil

It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

yellow blue

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

Checking Engine Oil

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

The engine oil dipstick has a yellow ring handle and is located on the passenger’s side of the engine.

6-11

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.

NOTICE:

Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross

hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged.

yellow blue

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol.

If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

The engine oil fill cap is located on the driver’s side engine valve cover.

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through.

If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines.

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

6-12

yellow blue

As shown in the chart, SAE 5W

-

30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W to be 0

_F (

-

30 if it’s going

-

18

_C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W

-

50.

NOTICE:

Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum

Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines

“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench

R

oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle.

If you are in an area where the temperature falls below

-

20

_F (

-

29

_C), consider using either an SAE 5W

-

30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W

-

30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures.

6-13

Engine Oil Additives

Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added.

When to Change Engine Oil

If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city maintenance schedule:

D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).

This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing.

D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop

and

go traffic).

D You operate your vehicle in dusty areas or off

road frequently.

D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle.

D The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application.

Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months

--

whichever occurs first.

yellow blue

If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every

7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months

--

whichever occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower.

What to Do with Used Oil

Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.)

Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free

flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help.

6-14

yellow blue

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner assembly has an indicator that lets you know when the engine air cleaner/filter is dirty and needs to be serviced.

The indicator is located on the air intake tube between the engine air cleaner and the engine. See “Owner

Checks and Services” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet to determine when to check the indicator.

If the area inside the clear section of the indicator is green, no engine air cleaner/filter service is required.

When the area inside the indicator is orange and

CHANGE AIR FILTER appears, the filter should be replaced.

Your engine air cleaner/filter is located between the battery and coolant recovery tank.

To remove the engine air cleaner/filter:

1. Unhook the retainer clips and remove the cover.

6-15

2. Lift the filter and the connected duct out of the air cleaner housing. Hold the duct and remove the filter by both pulling and twisting the filter away from the duct. Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.

3. Clean the filter sealing surface of the duct and the filter housing.

4. Install the new filter by pushing it all the way to the stop on the duct.

5. Install the duct and the filter into the air cleaner housing. Make sure that the duct fits properly into the housing.

6. Install the cover and fasten the two retaining clips.

7. After the filter is properly serviced, the indicator should be reset. Push the button on top of the indicator to reset it to the green (clean) filter zone.

6-16

yellow blue

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the engine air cleaner/filter. See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.

CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

NOTICE:

If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving.

yellow blue

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change

A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles

(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:

D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90

_F (32_C) or higher.

D In hilly or mountainous terrain.

D When doing frequent trailer towing.

D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter every

100,000 miles (166 000 km).

See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the

Maintenance Schedule booklet.

6-17

How to Check

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

NOTICE:

Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have been driving:

D When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).

D At high speed for quite a while.

D In heavy traffic

--

especially in hot weather.

D While pulling a trailer.

6-18

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180

_F to 200_F

(82

_C to 93_C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles

(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50

_F

(10

_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes. Then follow the hot check procedures.

Checking Transmission Fluid Cold

A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off and is used only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 50

_F (10_C) or more. If it’s colder than 50

_F (10_C), you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low during a cold check, you must perform a hot check before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.

Checking the Fluid Level

D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.

D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P).

yellow blue

D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

D Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

yellow blue

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again.

1. The red transmission dipstick is located at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger’s side.

Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area, below the cross

hatched area, for a cold check or in the HOT area or cross

hatched area for a hot check.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.

6-19

How to Add Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule booklet to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See

“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

Rear Axle

When to Check and Change Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See

“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Maintenance

Schedule booklet.

How to Check Lubricant

yellow blue

NOTICE:

We recommend you use only fluid labeled

DEXRON

R

-

III, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transmission.

Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON

R

-

III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

D After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.”

D When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.

6-20

yellow blue

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.

Four

-

Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance

Inspections” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.

How to Check Lubricant

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

Use care not to overtighten plug.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.

6-21

Front Axle

When to Check and Change Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See

“Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Maintenance

Schedule booklet.

How to Check Lubricant

yellow blue

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you may need to add some lubricant.

When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler plug hole.

When the differential is at operating temperature

(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.

6-22

yellow blue

Radiator Pressure Cap

The radiator pressure cap must be tightly installed with the arrows on the cap lined up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.

NOTICE:

Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure

type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.

Thermostat

Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature.

When you replace your thermostat, an ACDelco

R thermostat is recommended.

6-23

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with

DEX

-

COOL

R

engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles

(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only

DEX

-

COOL

R

extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and

DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant will:

D Give freezing protection down to

-

34

_F (

-

37

_C).

D Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).

D Protect against rust and corrosion.

D Help keep the proper engine temperature.

D Let the warning gages work as they should.

NOTICE:

When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX

-

COOL

R

(silicate

free) coolant.

If coolant other than DEX

-

COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner

--

at

30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX

-

COOL

R

is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

What to Use

Use a mixture of one

half clean, drinkable water and one

half DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.

yellow blue

6-24

CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX

-

COOL

R

coolant.

yellow blue

NOTICE:

If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.

The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE:

If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful.

6-25

yellow blue

Checking Coolant

The coolant recovery tank is located on the passenger’s side at the rear corner of the engine compartment.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be at the HOT mark, or a little higher.

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX

-

COOL

R coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

6-26

CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.

With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator.

Never turn the radiator pressure cap

--

even a little

--

when the engine and radiator are hot.

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

Power Steering Fluid

When to Check Power Steering Fluid

It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

yellow blue

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see

“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the

Maintenance Schedule booklet. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

6-27

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to Use

When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY.

Add washer fluid until the tank is full.

NOTICE:

D When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.

D Don’t mix water with ready

to

use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.

D Fill your washer fluid tank only

three

quarters full when it’s very cold.

This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.

D Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in

your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint.

yellow blue

6-28

Brakes

Brake Fluid

yellow blue

So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.

Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add

(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled with DOT

-

3 brake fluid.

CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance

Inspections” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.

6-29

Checking Brake Fluid

You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.

Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake system checked to see if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the

MAX mark.

What to Add

When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT

-

3 brake fluid. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

6-30

yellow blue

NOTICE:

D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral

based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

D If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s

painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index.

CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:

Continuing to drive with worn

out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Brake Wear

Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.

Disc brake pads have built

in wear indicators that make a high

pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications.

6-31

Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.

See “Brake System Inspection” in the Maintenance

Schedule booklet under Part C “Periodic Maintenance

Inspections.”

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake Adjustment

Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes adjust for wear.

If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times.

yellow blue

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top

quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system

--

for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in

--

be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change

--

for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.

Fluid Leak Check

After the vehicle has been parked for awhile, inspect the surface under the vehicle for water, oil, fuel or other fluids.

Water dripping from the air conditioning system after it has been used is normal. If you notice fuel leaks or fumes, the causes should be found and corrected at once.

6-32

Battery

Your new vehicle comes with an ACDelco Freedom

R battery. When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend an ACDelco Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label.

Vehicle Storage

If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative (

-

) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down.

yellow blue

Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods.

Also, for your audio system, see “Theft

-

Deterrent

Feature” in the Index.

Bulb Replacement

Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps are off and the engine isn’t running. For the proper bulb type, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index. For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer’s service department.

Halogen Bulbs

CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.

CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.

6-33

Headlamps

1. Remove the parking/turn signal assembly as described under “Parking/Turn Signal Lamps”, following this procedure.

2. Remove the two turn signal bulb sockets and the sidemarker bulb socket from the parking/turn signal assembly by turning counterclockwise.

3. Set the parking/turn signal assembly to the side.

5. Pull the headlamp assembly out.

4. Remove the two bolts at the top of the radiator support as shown.

6-34

6. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.

7. Unplug the electrical connector.

8. Put the new bulb into the lens assembly and turn it clockwise until it is tight.

9. Plug in the electrical connector.

10. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle. Install and tighten the two bolts.

yellow blue

11. Install the two turn signal bulb sockets and the sidemarker bulb socket into the parking/turn signal bulb assembly.

12. Install the parking/turn signal assembly. Install and tighten the two screws.

Parking/Turn Signal Lamps

yellow blue

2. Pull the parking/turn signal assembly toward the side of the vehicle until the tabs are out of the grille.

1. Remove the two screws on the side of the parking/turn signal bulb assembly. The parking/turn signal assembly must be removed to provide clearance for headlamp removal.

A. Turn Signal Bulb

B. Sidemarker Bulb

3. To remove a bulb, turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it from the assembly.

4. Install the parking/turn signal lamp assembly by sliding it from the side of the vehicle toward the center until the tabs fully engage the grille.

5. Install and tighten the two screws.

6-35

Fog Lamps

The fog lamp bulb assembly is located under the front bumper.

1. Remove the fog lamp bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise.

2. Remove the connector from the bulb by lifting the tabs on the sides of the connector.

3. Insert the new bulb into the connector until the tabs lock into the connector.

4. Insert the fog lamp bulb socket into the fog lamp housing and turn it clockwise one

quarter of a turn.

6-36

yellow blue

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)

The individual bulbs in the CHMSL are not replaceable.

See your dealer for assistance.

Rear Lamps

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove the two black plastic plugs from the rear lamp assembly access holes.

3. Remove the two rear lamp assembly screws inside the fender and pull out the lamp assembly. You may want to use a magnetic screwdriver when removing the screws.

yellow blue

4. Remove the screws from the bulb retainer and take the bulb retainer off of the lamp assembly.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out of the socket.

6. Put in a new bulb and push it straight in until it is tight.

7. Replace the bulb retainer.

8. Replace the rear lamp assembly and tighten the screws. You may want to use a magnetic screwdriver when installing the screws.

9. Close the tailgate.

6-37

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

yellow blue

Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the

Index. Here’s how to remove the Shephard’s Hook type.

To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly:

1. Lift the wiper arm and rotate the blade until it is facing away from the windshield.

2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

Tires

Your new vehicle comes with high

quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Cadillac Warranty booklet for details.

Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper Blade

Check” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet under Part B “Owner Checks and Services” for more information.

6-38

CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.

D Overloading your tires can cause

overheating as a result of too much friction.

You could have an air

out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.

D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as

overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold.

D Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,

punctured or broken by a sudden impact

--

such as when you hit a pothole.

Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your

tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.

yellow blue

Inflation -- Tire Pressure

The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

You can operate some vehicles at reduced inflation pressures only when you’ll be carrying reduced loads.

On those vehicles, the minimum cold inflation pressures for a typical reduced load are printed on the Improved

Ride Tire Pressure label located on the driver’s door.

Weigh the vehicle to find the load on each tire and see the label for the minimum cold inflation pressures for that load.

6-39

NOTICE:

Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get the following:

D Too much flexing

D Too much heat

D Tire overloading

D Bad wear

D Bad handling

D Bad fuel economy.

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following:

D Unusual wear

D Bad handling

D Rough ride

D Needless damage from road hazards.

yellow blue

When to Check

Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket

type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Inspection and Rotation

Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles

(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and

“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled

Maintenance Services” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet for scheduled rotation intervals.

6-40

When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct rotation patterns shown here.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification/Tire label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.

yellow blue

CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

(See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)

6-41

When It’s Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true:

D You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire.

D You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.

D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

yellow blue

D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.

Buying New Tires

To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Certification/Tire label.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all

season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”

(for mud and snow).

If you ever replace your tires with those not having a

TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias

belted or radial) as your original tires.

6-42

CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types

(radial and bias

belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash.

Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels.

CAUTION:

If you use bias

ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial

ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

yellow blue

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter

type snow tires, space

saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited

production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire

Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

6-43

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half

(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

--

AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,

B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight

ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

yellow blue

Temperature

--

A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades

B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

6-44

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

yellow blue

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load

carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.

It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

6-45

NOTICE:

The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the body and chassis.

See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

NOTICE:

Don’t use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.

Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the rear tires.

yellow blue

6-46

Appearance Care

Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.

When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.

Never use these to clean your vehicle:

D Gasoline

D Benzene

D Naphtha

D Carbon Tetrachloride

D Acetone

D Paint Thinner

D Turpentine

D Lacquer Thinner

D Nail Polish Remover

yellow blue

They can all be hazardous

--

some more than others

--

and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.

In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

D Alcohol

D Laundry Soap

D Bleach

D Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle

Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet

Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi

-

Purpose Interior

Cleaner and Capture Non

-

Solvent Dry Spot and Soil

Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get

GM

approved cleaning products from your dealer.

(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

6-47

Here are some cleaning tips:

D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

D Clean up stains as soon as you can

--

before they set.

D Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.

D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set.

Fabric Protection

Your vehicle has carpet fabric that has been treated with

Scotchgard t Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It protects fabrics by repelling oil and water, which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this protection, you still need to clean your carpet often to keep it looking new.

Further information on cleaning is available by calling

1

-

800

-

433

-

3296 (in Minnesota, 1

-

800

-

642

-

6167).

yellow blue

Cleaning Vinyl

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more than once.

D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Cleaning Leather

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent

based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather.

6-48

yellow blue

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel

Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components

Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish.

Cleaning Wood Panels

Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth.

Cleaning Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker won’t be damaged. Clean spots with just water and mild soap.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection.

Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

Cleaning Glass Surfaces

Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.

(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later.

If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.

Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid.

6-49

Cleaning the Outside of the

Windshield, Backglass and

Wiper Blades

If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield

Cleaner, Bon Ami

R

Powder (non

scratching glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full

strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.)

6-50

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle

The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your Vehicle

The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.

Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get

GM

approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See

“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all

cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.

yellow blue

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM

approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.

The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non

abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

NOTICE:

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

yellow blue

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non

abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts

Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually needed. However, you may use chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.

6-51

Cleaning Aluminum Wheels

Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on any wheels other than chrome

plated wheels.

Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning Tires

To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.

NOTICE:

When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.

Petroleum

based products may damage the paint finish and tires.

Sheet Metal Damage

If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti

corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

yellow blue

6-52

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch

up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.

Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you.

yellow blue

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet

shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Cadillac will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within

12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

6-53

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

PART NUMBER

994954

1050172

1050173

1050174

1050214

1050427

1052918**

1052925

1052929

1052930

12345721

12345725

12377964*

12377966*

12377984*

SIZE

23 in. x 25 in.

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

8 oz. (0.237 L)

2.5 sq. ft.

12 oz. (0.354 L)

DESCRIPTION

Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated

USAGE

Exterior polishing cloth

Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt

Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass

16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner

32 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl Cleaner

23 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner

8 oz. (0.237 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

Armor All t Protectant

Multi-Purpose Interior

Cleaner

Wheel Cleaner

Capture Dry Spot Remover

Synthetic Chamois

Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls

Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops

Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints

Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas t, plastic, rubber and vinyl

Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels and floor mats

Spray on and rinse with water

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

16 oz. (0.473 L)

Silicone Tire Shine

Finish Enhancer

Cleaner Wax

Surface Cleaner

Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric

Shines vehicle without scratching

Spray on tire shine

Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants

Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish

Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks

See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.

See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.

* For exterior use only.

** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.

6-54

yellow blue

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification

The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts.

yellow blue

Service Parts Identification Label

You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:

D your VIN,

D the model designation,

D paint information and

D a list of all production options and special equipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

6-55

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

NOTICE:

Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

Some add

on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing

Your Air Bag

-

Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

yellow blue

Headlamp Wiring

The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker in the lamp switch. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to flicker on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wipers

The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.

Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow, etc., may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other Power Options

Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes.

This protects the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed.

6-56

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver

colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without lighter

--

like the radio or cigarette

--

and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.

Replace it as soon as you can.

yellow blue

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The fuse block access door is on the driver’s side edge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.

You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse extractor is mounted to the fuse block access door.

To remove fuses, if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.

You may have spare fuses attached to the inside of the fuse block access door. These can be used to replace a bad fuse.

However, make sure that it is the correct amperage.

6-57

Fuse/Circuit

Breaker

1

Usage

2

Stop/TCC Switch, Buzzer, CHMSL,

Hazard Lamps, Stoplamps

Transfer Case

Fuse/Circuit

Breaker

3

Usage

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Courtesy Lamps, Cargo Lamp,

Glove Box Lamp, Dome/Reading

Lamps, Vanity Mirrors,

Power Mirrors

Instrument Cluster, DRL Relay,

Lamp Switch, Keyless Entry,

Low Coolant Module, Illuminated

Entry Module

Rear Comfort Controls

Cruise Control

Auxiliary Power Outlet

Crank

License Lamp, Parking Lamps,

Taillamps, Tailgate Lamps, Front

Sidemarkers, Fog Lamp Relay,

Door Switch Illumination,

Fender Lamps, Headlamp

Switch Illumination

Air Bag System

Wiper Motor, Washer Pump

A/C, A/C Blower,

High Blower Relay

yellow blue

6-58

Fuse/Circuit

Breaker

13

Usage

14

15

16

17

18

19

Power Amp, Rear Liftglass,

Cigarette Lighter, Door Lock Relay,

Power Lumbar Seat

4WD Indicator, Cluster, Front and

Rear Comfort Controls, Instrument

Switches, Radio Illumination,

Chime Module

DRL Relay, Fog Lamp Relay

Front and Rear Turn Signals,

Back

-

Up Lamps, BTSI Solenoid

Radio (Ignition)

4WAL/VCM, ABS, Cruise Control

Radio (Battery)

yellow blue

Fuse/Circuit

Breaker

20

Usage

21

22

23

24

A

B

PRNDL, Automatic Transmission,

Speedometer, Check Gages,

Warning Lights

Security/Steering

Auxiliary Power, Headlamp Delay

Rear Wiper, Rear Washer Pump

Front Axle, 4WD Indicator Lamp,

TP2 Relay

Power Door Lock, Six

-

Way Power

Seat, Keyless Entry Module

Power Windows

6-59

Underhood Fuse/Relay Center

The underhood fuse/relay center is located in the rear of the engine compartment near the brake fluid reservoir. Move the retainer clips for the cover to access the fuse block.

You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse extractor is mounted to the interior fuse block. To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.

Name

ECM

-

B

Circuits Protected

Fuel Pump, PCM/VCM

RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger

IGN

-

E Auxiliary Fan Relay Coil,

A/C Compressor Relay,

Hot Fuel Module

FUEL SOL Not Used

6-60

yellow blue

Name

GLOW

PLUG

HORN

Circuits Protected

Not Used

Horn, Underhood Lamp

AUX FAN Auxiliary Fan

ECM

-

1 Injectors, PCM/VCM

HTD ST

-

FR Heated Front Seats

A/C Air Conditioning

HTD MIR Heated Outside Mirrors

ENG

-

1 Ignition Switch, EGR,

Canister Purge, EVRV Idle Coast

Solenoid, Heated O

2

HTD ST

-

RR Heated Rear Seats

AUX B Trailer Wiring

yellow blue

Name

AUX A

Circuits Protected

SEO Wiring

LIGHTING Headlamp and Panel Dimmer

Switch, Fog and Courtesy Fuses

BATT Battery, Fuse Block Busbar

IGN A

IGN B

ABS

Ignition Switch

Ignition Switch

Anti

-

Lock Brake Module

BLOWER Hi Blower and Rear Blower Relays

STOP/HAZ Stoplamps

HEATED

SEATS

Heated Seats

6-61

Replacement Bulbs

LAMP OR BULB

HEADLAMPS

Low Beam

High Beam

TRADE NO.

9006 HB4

9005 HB3

LAMP OR BULB

EXTERIOR

Front Marker Lamp

Front Parking and Turn Lamp

Rear Parking Lamp

Rear Stop and Turn Lamp

Back

up Lamp

License Plate Lamp

Underhood Lamp

Fog Lamp

TRADE NO.

194

2357NA

3057

3057

3156

194

93

894

POWER RATING AT 12.8V, WATTS

55

65

QTY

2

4

2

2

2

2

1

2

6-62

QTY

2

2

yellow blue

LAMP OR BULB

INTERIOR

Dome Lamps

Reading Lamps

Roof Console Lamps*

Door Courtesy Lamp

Instrument Panel Compartment Lamp

Ashtray Lamp

Sunshade Vanity Mirror

TRADE NO.

211

-

2

211

-

2

168

194

194

194

74

QTY

1

1

4

2

2

2

4

Capacities and Specifications

Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet for more information.

Engine Identification

Engine

“VORTEC” 5700

Type

RPO Code

VIN Code

Fuel System

V8

L31

R

SFI*

*Sequential Fuel Injection

yellow blue

6-63

Wheels and Tires

MODEL

K 1500

Tire Pressure

DESCRIPTION

6 bolts (14 mm)

See the Certification/Tire label on the rear edge of the driver’s door.

Cooling System Capacity (Approximate)

After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Cooling System” in the Index.

ENGINE

“VORTEC” 5700 V8

VIN

R

Crankcase Capacity (Approximate)

After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

ENGINE VIN

“VORTEC” 5700 V8 R

[Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.

TORQUE

140 lb

ft (190 N·m)

QTY

17.5 Quarts (16.5 L)

QUANTITY WITH FILTER

[

5.0 Quarts (4.8 L)

yellow blue

6-64

Fuel Tank Capacity (Approximate)

Quantity 30.0 Gallons (113.0 L)

Air Conditioning Refrigerants

Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.

If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.

If you’re not sure, ask your dealer.

See refrigerant charge label under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements.

Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts

Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing, and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was built, or if you have any questions, please contact your Cadillac dealer.

Oil Filter

Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter

Spark Plugs

AC Type PF52

AC Type A1300C

[

AC Type 41

-

932

yellow blue

Spark Plug Gap

Fuel Filter

Wiper Blades

(Front)

Wiper Blade

Type (Front)

Wiper Blade

Length (Front)

Wiper Blade

(Rear)

Wiper Blade

Type (Rear)

Wiper Blade

Length (Rear)

0.060 in. (1.52 mm)

AC Type GF626

GM Part No. 22154886

Trico

18.0 inches (45.0 cm)

GM Part No. 22154396

Trico

14.0 inches (35.5 cm)

[A1301C high

capacity air cleaner filter.

6-65

NOTES

6-66

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7

-

2

7

-

3

7

-

4

7

-

5

7

-

5

7

-

7

7

-

8

7

-

8

Here you will find out how to contact Cadillac if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects.

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users

Customer Assistance Offices

GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities

Roadside Service

Roadside Service for the Hearing or

Speech Impaired

Courtesy Transportation

Transportation Options

7

-

10 Warranty Information

7

-

10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United

7

States Government

-

11 Reporting Safety Defects to the

7

Canadian Government

-

11 Reporting Safety Defects to

7

General Motors

-

11 Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada

7-

7-1

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.

Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

7-2

yellow blue

STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact GM of Canada

Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling

1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the following information available to give the Customer

Assistance Representative:

D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.)

D Dealership name and location

D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern.

STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you must file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance

Information booklet for information on the Canadian

Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

yellow blue

You may contact the BBB using the toll

free telephone number or write them at the following address:

BBB Auto Line

Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.

4200 Wilson Boulevard

Suite 800

Arlington, VA 22203

-

1804

Telephone: 1

-

800

-

955

-

5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.

Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users

To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech

impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),

Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer

Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with

Cadillac by dialing: 1

-

800

-

833

-

CMCC (2622).

(TTY users in Canada can dial 1

-

800

-

263

-

3830.)

7-3

Customer Assistance Offices

Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to

Cadillac, the letter should be addressed to Cadillac’s

Customer Assistance Center.

United States

Cadillac Customer Assistance Center

Cadillac Motor Car Division

P.O. Box 436004

Pontiac, MI 48343-6004

1-800-458-8006

1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112

Canada

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

7-4

1-800-263-3777 (English)

1-800-263-7854 (French)

1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

GMODC

-

Customer Communication Centre

169-007

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 905-644-4112

Fax: 905-644-4866

Caribbean Numbers

1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico

1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico

1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic

1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic

1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands

1-800-389-0009 Bahamas

1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.

If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean, call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.

yellow blue

yellow blue

GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities

This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle (hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.).

Roadside Service

This program can also provide you with free resource information, such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers. The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1

Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1

-

800

-

323

-

9935.

-

800

-

833

-

9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call

1

-

800

-

GM

-

DRIVE (463

-

7483) for details. When calling from outside Canada, please dial 1

-

905

-

644

-

3063.

All TTY users call 1

-

800

-

263

-

3830.

Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and, when appropriate, a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide on

site service.

7-5

Each technician travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.

Cadillac Roadside Service r can be reached by dialing

1

-

800

-

882

-

1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

This service is provided at no charge for any warranty

covered situation and for a nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer under warranty. Roadside

Service is available only in the United States and Canada.

Cadillac Owner Privileges

t

Roadside Service provides several Cadillac

Owner Privileges t at “no charge,” throughout your 1999 Cadillac Warranty Period

--

48 months/

50,000 miles (80 000 km).

Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the following situations:

D Towing Service

D Battery Jump Starting

D Lock Out Assistance

D Fuel Delivery

D Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)

7-6

yellow blue

yellow blue

D Trip Interruption

--

If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles

(80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered are hotel, meals and rental car.

Roadside Service Availability

Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada, an advisor is available to assist you over the phone.

A dealer technician, if available, can travel to your location within a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest

Cadillac dealership.

Reaching Roadside Service

Dial the toll

1

free Roadside Service number:

-

800

-

882

-

1112. An experienced Roadside

Service Advisor will assist you and request the following information:

D A description of the problem

D Name, home address, home telephone number

D Location of your Cadillac and number you are calling from

D The model year, Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN), mileage and date of delivery

Roadside Service for the Hearing or

Speech Impaired

Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillac has installed special telecommunication devices called Text

Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.

Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a conventional teletypewriter can communicate with

Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada

1

-

800

-

833

-

CMCC

--

daily, 24 hours.

7-7

Courtesy Transportation

Cadillac has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealerships are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the

Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

Plan Ahead When Possible

When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If it is determined that your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately and is still operative, you are encouraged to drive the vehicle until scheduling can be accomplished.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

7-8

yellow blue

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait Cadillac helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Participating dealerships can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.

Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum) may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to

$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.

Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

When your vehicle is unavailable due to warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a maximum of $35.00 per day supported by receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like

vehicle as a courtesy rental.

yellow blue

Additional Program Information

Courtesy Transportation is available during the

Bumper

to

-

Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner

Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealerships and all program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.

Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the

Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General

Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, alternative transportation may be available under the

Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details.

7-9

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.

General Motors and participating dealerships reserve the right to deny a rental vehicle to anyone not possessing a valid motor vehicle operators license in their name, anyone who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or anyone whose mental or physical abilities are impaired so as to be unable to operate a motor vehicle safely.

Warranty Information

Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information.

yellow blue

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

TO THE UNITED STATES

GOVERNMENT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or

General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll

free at 1

-

800

-

424

-

9393 (or 366

-

0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation

Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline.

7-10

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

TO THE CANADIAN

GOVERNMENT

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify

Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General

Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada

330 Sparks Street

Tower C

Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

TO GENERAL MOTORS

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1

-

800

-

458

-

8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance Center

Cadillac Motor Car Division

P.O. Box 436004

Pontiac, MI 48343

-

6004

yellow blue

In Canada, please call us at 1

-

800

-

263

-

3777 (English) or 1

-

800

-

263

-

7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Ordering Service and Owner

Publications in Canada

Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles.

The toll-free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.

7-11

yellow blue

1999 CADILLAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION

The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)

CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1999 CADILLAC

SERVICE MANUALS

Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00

OWNER’S INFORMATION

Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and

Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00

TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE

UNIT REPAIR MANUAL

This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments and specifications for the

1999 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00

SERVICE BULLETINS

Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS

Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON

THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:

Helm, Incorporated

S

P.O. Box 07130

S

Detroit, MI 48207

7-12

OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123

Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)

9

9

1

9

yellow blue

ORDER TOLL FREE

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)

1-800-551-4123

(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)

FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927

Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call

1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied against the original order.

ITEM DESCRIPTION

VEHICLE MODEL

NAME YEAR

QTY.

PRICE

EACH*

TOTAL

PRICE

1999 $90.00

Service Manual

Car & Light Truck

Transmission Unit Repair

1999 $50.00

Owner’s Manual In Portfolio

1999 $20.00

Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio

1999 $15.00

G

M

S

H

I

P

T

O

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.

Mail completed order form to:

HELM, INCORPORATED

S

P.O. Box 07130

S

Detroit, MI 48207

For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.

(CUSTOMER’S NAME)

(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)

(CITY)

(ATTENTION)

DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.

GM-CAD-ORD99

(ZIP CODE) (STATE)

( )

AREA CODE

*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)

P

A

Y

M

E

N

T

Check or Money

Order payable to

Helm, Inc. (USA funds only — do not send cash.)

MasterCard

VISA

Discover

Account

Number:

Expiration

Date mo/yr:

TOTAL MATERIAL

Michigan Purchasers add 6% sales tax

U.S. Order Processing

Canadian Postage

(See Note Below)

GRAND TOTAL

$6.00

Check here if your billing address is different from your shipping address shown.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents

U.S. order processing.

NOTES

7-14

yellow blue

yellow blue

Section 8 Index

A

ir Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding Equipment

How Does it Restrain

How it Works

Location

Air Cleaner/Filter

Air Conditioning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Readiness Light

Servicing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

What Makes it Inflate

What Will You See After it Inflates

When Should it Inflate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air Conditioning Refrigerants

Alignment and Balance, Tire

3

1

6

-

-

25, 2

-

73

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15, 6

-

2, 3

-

3, 3

-

4

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

23

1

-

30

1

-

27

1

-

25

1

1

-

-

-

25

1

-

29

27

1

-

28

1

-

27

65

6

-

65

6

-

45

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning

Antenna, Fixed

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

52

3

-

22

6

-

24 Antifreeze

Anti

-

Lock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

75, 4

-

7

Brakes

Anti

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Theft, Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

7

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appearance Care and Materials

Arbitration Program

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

18

6

-

47

6

-

54

7

-

3

8-

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio Equipment, Adding

Audio Systems

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

62

3

-

21

3

-

7

2

-

48

Automatic Transmission

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation

Overdrive

Shifting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

17

2

-

26

2

-

28

2

-

26

2

-

63

Axle

Front

Locking Rear

Rear

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

22

2

-

39

6

-

20

B

attery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

33

5

-

3

Replacement, Keyless Entry

Rundown Protection

Warnings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2

-

2

-

9

51

-

3, 5

-

5

BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Better Business Bureau Mediation

Blizzard

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

-

3

7

-

3

4

-

38

8-1

Brake

Adjustment

Fluid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Master Cylinder

Parking

Pedal Travel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing System Parts

System Warning Light

Trailer

Braking

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

32

6

-

29

6

-

29

2

-

33

6

-

32

6

-

32

2

-

74

4

-

47

Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brakes, Anti

-

Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

31

4

-

7

4

-

6

4

-

9 Braking in Emergencies

Break

-

In, New Vehicle

Brightness Control

Bulb Replacement

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

21

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2

-

50

-

33, 6

-

62

C

apacities and Specifications

Carbon Monoxide

Cargo Tie Downs

Cassette Tape Player

CD Changer

Center High

-

. . . . . . . . . .

Cargo Security Shade

Cassette Tape Player Care

Cassette Tape Player Errors

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement

Center Passenger Position

Certification/Tire Label

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player

2

-

11, 2

-

38, 4

-

39, 4

-

46, 4

-

48

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

3

6

-

-

-

-

63

3

-

21

3

59

2

-

60

-

8

21

3

-

11

-

16

37

1

-

37

4

-

41

yellow blue

Chains, Safety

Chains, Tire

Where to Put

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing a Flat Tire

Cleaner/Filter, Air

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Charging System Warning Light

Check Gages Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking Your Restraint Systems

Chemical Paint Spotting

Child Restraints

Top Strap

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cigarette Lighter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Circuit Breakers and Fuses

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position

Securing in the Center Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing in the Right Front Seat Position

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1

-

47

1

-

49

1

-

51

1

-

46

1

-

45

2

-

62

6

-

57

4

-

47

6

-

46

5

-

19

2

-

73

2

-

81

1

-

56

6

-

53

1

-

41

-

15, 6

-

65

Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Fabric

Glass

Inside of Your Vehicle

Instrument Panel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior Plastic Components

Leather

Outside of Your Vehicle

Speaker Covers

Special Problems

Stains

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

52

6

-

51

6

-

47

6

-

49

6

-

47

6

-

49

6

-

49

6

-

48

6

-

50

6

-

49

6

-

47

6

-

47

8-2

Tires

Vinyl

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Wood Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Climate Control System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

52

6

-

48

6

-

52

6

-

50

6

-

49

3

-

2

Clock, Setting the

Comfort Controls

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

7

3

-

2

1

-

34

Compact Disc

Care

Player

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3

-

22

-

14, 3

-

16

Player Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compass, Electronic

3

-

15, 3

-

18

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

52

Compass, Rearview Mirror with

Console Storage

Console

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Mounted CD Changer

Control of a Vehicle

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Convex Outside Mirror

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Heater, Engine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

52

-

56, 2

-

57

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

-

16

4

-

6

2

-

58

2

-

56

6

-

24

2

-

25

5

-

12 Recovery Tank

Cooling System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

11

7

-

8

2

-

44 Cruise Control

Cupholders

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

57, 2

-

58

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users

Customer Assistance Information

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7

-

3

7

-

1

7

-

2

yellow blue

D

amage, Finish

Dead Battery

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Damage, Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Daytime Running Lamps

Defects, Reporting Safety

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

53

6

-

52

2

-

48

-

81

5

-

3

7

-

10

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Defogger, Rear Window

Defogging

Defrosting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dolby Noise Reduction

Dome Lamps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

2

3

-

6

3

-

6

3

-

6

3

-

11

2

-

50

Door

Locks

Panel

Rear

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

4

2

-

11

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear Security Locks

Storage Pocket

Driver Position

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

11

2

-

6

2

-

58

1

-

14

Driving

City

Defensive

Drunken

Freeway

In a Blizzard

In the Rain

Night

Off

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

31

4

-

2

4

-

3

4

-

32

4

-

38

4

-

28

4

-

27

4

-

14

On Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

9

4

-

50

8-3

Driving (Continued)

E

lectric Tailgate Glass Release 2

-

40

-

23, 3

-

21, 6

-

56

-

56

-

55, 3

-

6

Electrochromic Rearview Mirror with Compass/Temperature

-

52

-

52

-

10

-

15, 6

-

65

-

24

-

25

-

76

-

64

-

38

-

55

-

8

-

38

-

63

-

23

-

34

-

36

-

30

-

28

-

36

-

48

-

3

yellow blue

F

abric Cleaning 6

-

47

-

16

-

18

-

20

-

17

Theft

-

Deterrent Arming Method 2

-

19

Theft

-

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Deterrent Arming Verification 2

-

19

-

8

-

5

-

15, 6

-

65

-

14, 6

-

65

-

51

-

53

-

28

-

2

-

11, 6

-

64

-

12

-

14

-

11

-

79

-

14

-

14

-

3

-

4

-

38

-

50

-

47

8-4

Flat Tire, Changing

Fluid Capacities

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

5

-

19

-

64, 6

-

65

Fluid Leak Check

Fog Lamps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

6

-

32

-

49, 6

-

36, 6

-

62

Folding the Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Foreign Countries, Fuel

Four

Four

-

Wheel Drive

Freeway Driving

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Wheel Drive, Automatic Transfer Case . . . .

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

5

6

-

5

-

29, 6

-

21

2

-

29, 6

-

21

4

-

32

French Language Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

Front

Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Axle Locking Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Park/Turn Signal Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . 6

6

-

22

2

-

29

-

35, 6

-

62

Sidemarker Lamp Bulb Replacement

Towing

. . . . . . . . 6

-

35, 6

-

62

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

-

8

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Canada

Gage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Filling a Portable Container

Filling Your Tank

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

3

6

-

3

6

-

8

6

-

5

2

-

82

In Foreign Countries

System Capacity

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

5

6

-

65

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

-

57

G

ages

Engine Coolant Temperature

Engine Oil Pressure

Fuel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

76

2

-

79

2

-

82

yellow blue

Speedometer

Tachometer

Voltmeter

GAWR

Glove Box

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gear Positions, Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

71

2

-

71

2

-

74

4

-

41

2

-

26

2

-

56

7

-

5

6

-

54

4

-

41

4

-

41

Guide en Français

GVWR

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

-

41

H

alogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hazard Warning Flashers

Head Restraints

Headlamp Delay

Headlamps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1

6

-

33

5

-

2

-

5, 1

-

6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

49

-

47, 6

-

34

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

High/Low Beam Changer

6

-

34, 6

-

62

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

42

On Reminder

Wiring

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

48

6

-

56

7

-

3

1

-

3 Heated Front Seats

Heated Rear Seats

Heating

High

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Beam Headlamps

3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

8

-

2, 3

-

4

Highway Hypnosis

Hill and Mountain Roads

Hitches, Trailer

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

42

4

-

34

4

-

34

4

-

46

8-5

Hood

Checking Things Under

Release

Horn

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydroplaning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

8

6

-

9

2

-

41

4

-

30

I

gnition Positions

Inflation, Tire

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inside Rearview Mirror

Instrument Panel

Interior Lamps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brightness Control

Cleaning

Cluster

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuse Block

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

22

6

-

39

2

-

52

2

-

68

2

-

50

6

-

49

2

-

70

6

-

57

2

-

50

J

ack, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

20

5

-

3

K

eyless Entry System

Keys

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

6

2

-

2

L

abels

Certification/Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Parts Identification

Tire

-

Loading Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

41

6

-

55

4

-

41

6

-

55

yellow blue

Lamps

Fog

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic

Cleaning Exterior

Delay

Dome

Exterior

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

47

2

-

48

6

-

51

2

-

49

2

-

50

2

-

47

-

49, 6

-

36, 6

-

62

2

-

50

2

-

48 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . .

2

-

6

2

-

35

Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

62

Lights

Air Bag Readiness

Anti

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Lock Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

25, 2

-

73

2

-

75, 4

-

7

Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Charging Warning System

Check Gages

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Daytime Running Lamps Indicator

Headlamp High

-

Beam Indicator

Safety Belt Reminder

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2

-

74

2

-

73

2

-

81

2

-

81

2

-

81

-

9, 2

-

72

Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service Engine Soon

Service Four

-

Wheel Drive

Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator

Loading Your Vehicle

Lockout Prevention

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loading Your Vehicle for Off

-

Road Driving . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

80

2

-

76

2

-

80

2

-

82

4

-

41

4

-

14

2

-

6

8-6

M

aintenance, Normal Replacement Parts 6

-

65

-

53

-

51

-

76

-

4

-

52

-

56

-

55, 3

-

6

Electrochromic Rearview with Compass/Temperature

-

52

-

52

-

55

-

4

-

34

-

41

N

et, Convenience 2

New Vehicle Break

-

In 2

-

-

58

-

27

21

-

27

-

65

-

4

-

4

-

5

-

6

-

40

-

61

yellow blue

O

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Off

-

71

-

Road Driving 4

-

14

Off

-

dometer 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Road Recovery 4

Oil, Engine

OnStar

R

6

-

-

71

11

-

11, 6

-

64

-

67

-

28

-

8

-

11, 7

-

12

P

aint Spotting, Chemical 6

-

53

Park

-

26

-

34

-

36

Parking

-

13

-

33

-

13

-

37

-

50

-

23

Passlock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

R

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

-

12

-

21, 2

-

80

Power

-

63

-

5

-

3

-

56

8-7

Power (Continued)

Remote Control Mirror

Seat

Steering

Steering Fluid

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

55

1

-

2

4

-

9

6

-

27

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts

2

-

39

1

-

3

1

-

22

Problems on the Road

Publications, Service and Owner

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

5

-

1

6

-

51

-

11, 7

-

12

R

adiator

Radio

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radiator Pressure Cap 6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Radio Reception

Rain, Driving In

Reading Lamps

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

15

-

23

3

-

8

3

-

20

4

-

28

2

-

51

Rear

Axle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

20

2

-

6

6

-

37

Outside Seat Position

Safety Belt Comfort Guides

Seat Audio (RSA)

Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Window Defogger

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield Wiper and Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Systems . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

30

1

-

34

3

-

12

1

-

30

3

-

6

2

-

44

3

-

3

yellow blue

Rear Doors

Rear Towing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

11

5

-

8

2

-

52

Electrochromic with Compass/Temperature

Display/Headlamp Delay

Inside

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reclining Front Seatbacks

Recovery Hooks

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

52

2

-

52

1

-

4

5

-

33

Recovery Tank, Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Recreational Vehicle Towing

Refrigerants, Air Conditioning

Remote Compact Disc Player

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

12

4

-

40

6

-

65

3

-

14

Replacement

Bulbs

Parts

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

-

62, 6

-

63

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

-

65

Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheel, Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

45

6

-

46

1

-

56

7

-

10

Restraints

Checking

Child

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1

-

56

1

-

41

-

5, 1

-

6

Head

Replacing Parts After a Crash

Retained Accessory Power

Reverse, Automatic Transmission

Right Front Passenger Position

Roadside Assistance

Rocking Your Vehicle

Rotation, Tires

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

56

2

-

23

2

-

27

1

-

23

7

-

5

5

-

33

6

-

40

8-8

S

afety Belt Extender

Safety Belts

Adults

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

56

1

-

8

1

-

14

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Center Passenger Position

Children

Driver Position

Extender

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to Wear Properly

Incorrect Usage

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

6

-

49

1

-

37

1

-

38

1

-

14

1

-

56

1

-

14

-

17, 1

-

54, 1

-

55

Lap Belt

Lap

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

37

1

-

14, 1

-

31

Larger Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Questions and Answers

Rear Comfort Guides

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

53

1

-

23

1

-

13

1

-

34

1

-

30

1

-

30 Rear Seat Passengers

Reminder Light

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

-

9, 2

-

72

Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Right Front Passenger Position

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1

-

56

1

-

23

-

16, 1

-

33

Smaller Children and Babies

Use During Pregnancy

Why They Work

Safety Chains

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Defects, Reporting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

38

1

-

22

1

-

10

4

-

47

7

-

10

Safety Warnings and Symbols

Seatback, Reclining Front

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

iii

-

4

yellow blue

Seats

Folding the Rear

Heated Front

Heated Rear

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lumbar Adjustment

Power

Rear

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Restraint Systems

Seat Controls

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . .

Second Gear, Automatic Transmission

Security Light

Security Shade

1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

-

5

1

-

3

1

-

8

1

-

3

1

-

2

1

-

5

1

-

1

1

-

2

-

47, 1

-

49, 1

-

51

2

-

28

2

-

80

2

-

59

6

-

2 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bulletins, Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

-

11, 7

-

12

Engine Soon Light

Manuals, Ordering

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

2

-

76

-

11, 7

-

12

6

-

55 Parts Identification Label

Publications, Ordering

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

-

11, 7

-

12

Work, Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service and Owner Publications

Service Four

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Wheel Drive Warning Light

7

6

-

2

6

-

1

-

11, 7

-

12

Service Publications

Sheet Metal Damage

Shift Lever

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Servicing Your Air Bag

-

Equipped Vehicle

7

-

11, 7

-

12

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

80

1

-

29

6

-

52

2

-

26

8-9

Shifting

Automatic Transmission

Into Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Out of Park (P)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2

-

26

2

-

34

2

-

36

-

16, 1

-

33

Signaling Turns

Skidding

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sound Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

42

4

-

13

3

-

21

6

-

63 Specifications and Capacities

Specifications, Engine

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Speech Impaired, Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

63

7

-

3

2

-

71 Speedometer

Speed

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Sensitive Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Stains, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

9

6

-

47

2

-

23

5

-

9 Steam

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

9

4

-

10

4

-

9

4

-

9

Power

Speed

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

9

2

-

41

Storage Compartments

Storage, Overhead

Storage, Vehicle

Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

Sun Visors

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

56

2

-

56

6

-

33

5

-

32

2

-

64

Symbols, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v

yellow blue

T

achometer

Tailgate

Tailgate, Glass Release

Tape Player Care

Theft

Theft

Theft

Arming

Disarming

Shock Sensor

Tires

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Deterrent Feature

-

Deterrent System

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driver’s Door Alarm Delay

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turning Off

THEFTLOCK

R

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Thermostat

Third Gear, Automatic Transmission

Tilt Steering Wheel

Time, Setting the

Tire Chains

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

-

7

6

-

46

Tire Loading

Tire

Cleaning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alignment and Balance

Buying New

Chains

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changing a Flat

Inflation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

41

4

-

41

6

-

38

6

-

45

6

-

42

6

-

46

5

-

19

6

-

52

6

-

39

2

-

15

2

-

16

2

-

13

2

-

16

3

-

18

6

-

23

2

-

28

2

-

41

2

-

71

2

-

11

2

-

40

3

-

21

2

-

12

3

-

18

2

-

13

2

-

14

8-10

Inspection and Rotation

Loading

Pressure

Temperature

Traction

Treadwear

Top Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Torque Lock

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Uniform Quality Grading

Used Wheel Replacement

Wear Indicators

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

When It’s Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Torque, Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

6

-

40

4

-

41

6

-

39

6

-

44

6

-

44

6

-

44

6

-

43

6

-

46

6

-

42

6

-

45

6

-

42

1

-

46

2

-

36

-

29, 6

-

64

Towing

From the Front

From the Rear

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Recreational Vehicle

5

-

8

5

-

8

4

-

40

Trailer

Your Vehicle

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

43

5

-

8

Trailer

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving on Grades

Driving with

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine Cooling When Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

47

4

-

50

4

-

48

4

-

51

yellow blue

Hitches

Maintenance When Towing

Parking on Hills

Safety Chains

Tongue Weight

Total Weight on Tires

Towing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turn Signals

Weight

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wiring Harness

Transfer Case

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transfer Case, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission Fluid, Automatic

Transmitter, Universal

Transmitters, Keyless Entry

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

45

4

-

52

6

-

21

2

-

29

6

-

17

2

-

64

2

-

6

7

-

8

4

-

46

4

-

51

4

-

50

4

-

47

4

-

45

4

-

46

4

-

43

4

-

49

Transportation, Courtesy

Trip Odometer

TTY Users

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turn and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

71

7

-

3

2

-

42

4

-

49

U

nderbody Maintenance

Universal Transmitter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Underhood Fuse/Relay Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

53

6

-

60

2

-

64

8-11

V

ehicle

Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

-

6

Damage Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

iv

-

55

Loading

Loading for Off

Storage

Ventilation System

Visors, Sun

Voltmeter

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-

Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

-

41

4

-

14

6

-

33

3

-

5

2

-

64

2

-

74

W

arning Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators

Warranty Information

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washer Fluid, Windshield

Washing Your Vehicle

Weatherstrips

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

-

2

2

-

72

7

-

10

6

-

28

6

-

50

6

-

50

Wheel

Alignment

Nut Torque

Replacement

Used Replacement

Wrench

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

6

-

45

-

29, 6

-

64

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

45

6

-

46

5

-

20

yellow blue

Window Lock

Windows

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lockout Switch

Power

Windshield Washer

Fluid

Rear

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

-

40

2

-

39

2

-

40

2

-

39

2

-

43

-

43, 6

-

28

2

-

44

2

-

42 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

-

38, 6

-

65

Cleaning the Blades

Fuses

Rear

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Winter Driving

Wiper Blades, Cleaning

Wiring Harness, Trailer

Wiring, Headlamp

Wrecker Towing

Wrench, Wheel

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

-

50

6

-

56

2

-

44

4

-

36

6

-

50

4

-

52

6

-

56

5

-

8

5

-

20

8-12

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement